DS-7308HUHI-K4 - Dictaphone Hikvision - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL DS-7308HUHI-K4 Hikvision

Abstract geometric composition with gray and red diamond shapes (no text or symbols)

Red background with white globe and hand symbol (no text or numbers)

Digital Video Recorder

User Manual

UD08135B

User Manual

COPYRIGHT © 2017 Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Co., Ltd.

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Any and all informaon, including, among others, wordings, pictures, graphs are the properes of Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Co., Ltd. or its subsidiaries (hereinaer referred to be "Hikvision"). This user manual (hereinaer referred to be "the Manual") cannot be reproduced, changed, translated, or distributed, parally or wholly, by any means, without the prior written permission of Hikvision. Unless otherwise spulated, Hikvision does not make any warranes, guarantees or representaons, express or implied, regarding to the Manual.

About this Manual

This Manual is applicable to Turbo HD Digital Video Recorder (DVR).

The Manual includes instrucons for using and managing the product. Pictures, charts, images and all other informaon hereinaer are for descripon and explanaon only. The informaon contained in the Manual is subject to change, without noce, due to rmware updates or other reasons. Please nd the latest version in the company website (hp://overseas.hikvision.com/en/).

Please use this user manual under the guidance of professionals.

Trademarks Acknowledgement

HIKVISION and other Hikvision's trademarks and logos are the properes of Hikvision in various jurisdicons. Other trademarks and logos menoned below are the properes of their respective owners.

Legal Disclaimer

TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE PRODUCT DESCRIBED, WITH ITS HARDWARE, SOFTWARE AND FIRMWARE, IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITH ALL FAULTS AND ERRORS, AND HIKVISION MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY. IN NO EVENT WILL HIKVISION, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, INCLUDING, AMONG OTHERS, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF DATA OR DOCUMENTATION, IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF HIKVISION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

REGARDING TO THE PRODUCT WITH INTERNET ACCESS, THE USE OF PRODUCT SHALL BE WHOLLY AT YOUR OWN RISKS. HIKVISION SHALL NOT TAKE ANY RESPONSIBILITES FOR ABNORMAL OPERATION, PRIVACY LEAKAGE OR OTHER DAMAGES RESULTING FROM CYBER ATTACK, HACKER ATTACK, VIRUS INSPECTION, OR OTHER INTERNET SECURITY RISKS; HOWEVER, HIKVISION WILL PROVIDE TIMELY TECHNICAL SUPPORT IF REQUIRED.

SURVEILLANCE LAWS VARY BY JURISDICTION. PLEASE CHECK ALL RELEVANT LAWS IN YOUR JURISDICTION BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT IN ORDER TO ENSURE THAT YOUR USE CONFORMS THE APPLICABLE LAW. HIKVISION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN THE EVENT THAT THIS PRODUCT IS USED WITH ILLEGITIMATE PURPOSES.

IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICTS BETWEEN THIS MANUAL AND THE APPLICABLE LAW, THE LATER PREVAILS.

Regulatory Informaon

FCC Informaon

Please take aenon that changes or modicaon not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC compliance: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protecon against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instrucon manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communicaons. Operaon of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

FCC Conditions

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operaon is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operaon.

EU Conformity Statement

This product and - if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked with "CE" and comply therefore with the applicable harmonized European standards listed under the EMC Direcve 2014/30/EU, the LVD Direcve 2014/35/EU, the RoHS Direcve 2011/65/EU.

2012/19/EU (WEEE direcve): Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. For proper recycling, return this product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment, or dispose of it at designated collecon points. For more informaon see: www.recyclethis.info

2006/66/EC (baery direcve): This product contains a baery that cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. See the product documentaon for speci baery informaon. The baery is marked with this symbol, which may include leering to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling, return the baery to your supplier or to a designated collecon point. For more informaon see:

www.recyclethis.info

Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance

This device meets the CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A) standards requirements.

Applicable Models

This manual is applicable to the models listed in the following table.

Series	Model
DS-7100HQHI-K1	DS-7104HQHI-K1DS-7108HQHI-K1DS-7116HQHI-K1
DS-7200HQHI-K1	DS-7204HQHI-K1DS-7208HQHI-K1DS-7216HQHI-K1
DS-7200HQHI-K2	DS-7208HQHI-K2DS-7216HQHI-K2
DS-7200HQHI-K/P	DS-7204HQHI-K1/PDS-7208HQHI-K2/PDS-7216HQHI-K2/P
DS-7200HUHI-K1	DS-7204HUHI-K1DS-7208HUHI-K1
DS-7200HUHI-K2	DS-7204HUHI-K2DS-7208HUHI-K2DS-7216HUHI-K2
DS-7200HUHI-K/P	DS-7204HUHI-K1/PDS-7208HUHI-K2/P
DS-7300HQHI-K4	DS-7304HQHI-K4DS-7308HQHI-K4DS-7316HQHI-K4
DS-7300HUHI-K4	DS-7304HUHI-K4DS-7308HUHI-K4DS-7316HUHI-K4
DS-9000HUHI-K8	DS-9008HUHI-K8DS-9016HUHI-K8
DS-7200HTHI-K1	DS-7204HTHI-K1
DS-7200HTHI-K2	DS-7204HTHI-K2DS-7208HTHI-K2

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are dened as follows.

Symbol	Description
NOTE	Provides additional informaon to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
WARNING	Indicates a potenally hazardous situaon, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradaon, or unexpected results.
DANGER	Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Safety Instructions

• Proper conguraon of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the installer and/or end-user.
• In the use of the product, you must be in strict compliance with the electrical safety regulaons of the naon and region. Please refer to technical specicaons for detailed informaon.
• Input voltage should meet both the SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and the Limited Power Source with 100 to 240 VAC, 12 VDC or 48 VDC according to the IEC60950-1 standard. Please refer to technical speciaons for detailed informaon.
• Do not connect several devices to one power adapter as adapter overload may cause over-heang or a re hazard.
• Please make sure that the plug is rmly connected to the power socket.
• If smoke, odor or noise rise from the device, turn o the power at once and unplug the power cable, and then please contact the service center.

Preventive and Cautionary Tips

Before connecng and operang your device, please be advised of the following ps:

● Ensure unit is installed in a well-venlated, dust-free environment.
● Unit is designed for indoor use only.
- Keep all liquids away from the device.
- Ensure environmental conditions meet factory speciaons.
- Ensure unit is properly secured to a rack or shelf. Major shocks or jolts to the unit as a result of dropping it may cause damage to the sensitive electronics within the unit.
● Use the device in conjuncon with an UPS if possible.
● Power down the unit before connecng and disconnectg accessories and peripherals.
● A factory recommended HDD should be used for this device.
- Improper use or replacement of the baery may result in hazard of explosion. Replace with the same or equivalent type only. Dispose of used baeries according to the instrucons provided by the baery manufacturer.
- Ensure to use the aached power adaptor only and not to change the adaptor randomly.
● The USB ash drive can only connect to mouse or keyboard.
● Use only power supplies listed in the user instrucons.

Product Key Features

General

- Connectable to Turbo HD and analog cameras;

● Supports UTC (Coaxitron) protocol for connecng camera over coax;

- Connectable to AHD cameras;

- Connectable to HDCVI cameras;

- Connectable to IP cameras;

- The analog signal inputs including Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, and CVBS can be automatically recognized without conguraon;

- -K/P series DVR support PoC (Power over Coaxitron) cameras conncon. DVR will detect the connected PoC cameras automacally, manage the power consumpon via the coaxial communicaon, and provide power to the cameras via coaxitron;

● Each channel supports dual-stream. And sub-stream supports up to WD1 resoluon;

● HQHI series DVR support up to 4 MP lite resolution of all the channels;

- HTHI, 7208/7216HUHI, 7300HUHI, and 9000HUHI series DVR support up to 8 MP resolution of all the channels;

- For HUHI and HTHI series DVR, 5 MP long distance transmission can be enabled for the analog cameras;

- Independent conguraon for each channel, including resoluon, frame rate, bit rate, image quality, etc.;

● The minimum frame rate for main stream and sub-stream is 1 fps;

- Encoding for both video stream and video & audio stream; audio and video synchronizaon during composite stream encoding;

● Supports enabling H.265+/H.264+ to ensure high video quality with lowered bit rate;

- H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 encoding for the main stream, and H.265/H.264 encoding for the sub-stream of analog cameras;

- Connectable to H.265 and H.264 IP cameras;

- For 7208/7216HUHI, 7300HUHI, and 9000HUHI series DVR, if the video encoding is H.264 or H.265, when 8 MP signal input is connected, H.264+ or H.265+ is disabled. If the video encoding is H.264+ or H.265+, when 8 MP signal input is connected, the video encoding will change to H.264 or H.265 automacally, and H.264+ or H.265+ is disabled;

- Defog level, night to day sensitivity, day to night sensitivity, IR light brightness, day/night mode, and WDR switch congorable for the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters;

● 4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras;

● Watermark technology.

Local Monitoring

● HDMI output at up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resoluon;
- For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series, there are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080 resoluon is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resoluon is supported;
- 1/4/6/8/9/16/25/36 screen live view is supported, and the display sequence of screens is adjustable;

i NOTE

• For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR, if the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output.
• For HUHI and HTHI series DVR, if you set the video output resoluon as 1024*768, when you set more than 16 windows, the device will recommend you to switch to higher output resoluon. If you set the video output resoluon as 1280*720 or 1280*1024, when you set more than 25 windows, the same note will pop up.

● Live view screen can be switched in group and manual switch and automac cycle live view are also provided, the interval of automac cycle can be adjusted;
- CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output.
- Quick seng menu is provided for live view;
● The selected live view channel can be shielded;
- For HUHI and HTHI series DVR, VCA informaon overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback for the supported analog and IP cameras;
- Moon detecon, video-tampering detecon, video excepon alarm, video loss alarm and VCA alarm funcons;
- For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR, 1-ch analog camera supports people counting and heat map funcons;
- -K/P series DVR can detect the PoC module excepon. When it cannot detect the PoC module or the PoC module is powered o abnormally, alarms are triggered, and linkage methods are congorable;
- HTHI series DVR support full-channel line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon. For HUHI series DVR, if enhanced VCA mode is enabled, full-channel line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon are supported, but 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input are not supported; if enhanced VCA mode is disabled, 2-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon are supported, and 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input are also supported. DS-7200HQHI series support up to 4-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon if enhanced VCA mode is enabled, and DS-7216HQHI series also support 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. DS-7300HQHI-K series DVR support up to 4-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon if enhanced VCA mode is enabled, and 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. For the analog channels, the line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon conict with other VCA detecon such as sudden scene change detecon, face detecon and vehicle detecon. You can only enable one funcon;

• For HUHI series DVR, the enhanced VCA mode conicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input;
• Privacy mask;
• Several PTZ protocols (including Omnicast VMS of Genetec) supported; PTZ preset, patrol and paern;
• Zooming in/out by clicking the mouse and PTZ tracing by dragging mouse;
• When Hikvision CVBS camera is connected, you can control PTZ via Coaxitron and call the OSD of the camera.

HDD Management

● Each disk with a maximum of 8 TB storage capacity for HTHI, HUHI and 7200/7300HQHI series DVR, and 6 TB for DS-7100HQHI-K1;
- 8 network disks (8 NAS disks, 8 IP SAN disks or n NAS disks + m IP SAN disks (n+m ≤ 8)) can be connected;
● Remaining recording me of the HDD can be viewed;
● Supports cloud storage;
● S.M.A.R.T. and bad sector detecon;
- HDD sleeping funcon;
- HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/W);
- HDD group management;
- HDD quota management; dierent capacity can be assigned to dierent channels.
- For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series, hot-swappable HDD supporting RAID0, RAID1, RAID5, RAID 6 and RAID10 storage scheme, and can be enabled and disabled on your demand. And 16 arrays can be congured.

Recording, Capture and Playback

NOTE

Capture is supported by DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR only.

• Holiday recording schedule conguraon;
  ● Cycle and non-cycle recording modes;
  ● Normal and event video encoding parameters;
• Mulple recording types: manual, connuous, alarm, moon, moon | alarm, moon & alarm and event;
• The device will note that the exported AVI video may have problems if the frame rates of the connuous and event recording are dierent;
  ● Supports POS triggered recording for DS-7300HQHI and DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR;
  ● 8 recording me periods with separated recording types;
  ● Supports Channel-Zero encoding;

● Main stream and sub-stream congorable for simultaneous recording;
- Pre-record and post-record for moon detecon triggered recording, and pre-record me for schedule and manual recording;
- Searching record les and captured pictures by events (alarm input/moon detecon);
- Customizaon of tags, searching and playing back by tags;
- Locking and unlocking of record les;
- Local redundant recording and capture;
- When Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, the informaon including the resolution and frame rate will be overlaid on the boom right corner of the live view for 5 seconds. When CVBS input is connected, the informaon such as NTSC or PAL will be overlaid on the boom right corner of the live view for 5 seconds.
- Searching and playing back record files by camera number, recording type, start me, end time, etc.;
● Smart playback to go through less eecve informaon;
- Main stream and sub-stream selectable for local/remote playback;
- Zooming in for any area when playback;
- Mul-channel reverse playback;
● Supports pause, fast forward, slow forward, skip forward, and skip backward when playback, locang by dragging the mouse on the progress bar;
● 4/8/16-ch synchronous playback;
● Manual capture, connuous capture of video images and playback of captured pictures.

Backup

● Exports data by a USB, and SATA device;
● Exports video clips when playback;
● Video and Log, Video and Player, and Player are selectable to export for backup;
● Management and maintenance of backup devices.

Alarm and Excepon

● Congurable arming me of alarm input/output;
● Alarms for video loss, moon detecon, video tampering, illegal login, network disconnected, IP conicon, record/capture excepon, HDD error, and HDD full, etc.;
- Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, audio alarm, nofying surveillance center, sending email and alarm output;
● One-key disarms the linkage acons of the alarm input;
● PTZ linking for the VCA alarm;
● VCA detecon alarm is supported;

i NOTE

DS-7100 does not support VCA alarm.

● Supports POS triggered alarm;
● Supports coaxial alarm;
- System will automatically reboot when a problem is detected in an attempt to restore normal funconality;
- You can enable false alarm ler for the moon detecon of the PIR cameras. Then only when the moon detecon events and PIR events are both triggered, the moon detecon alarm will be triggered.

Other Local Funcons

● Manual and automac video quality diagnoses;
- Operable by mouse and remote control;
- Three-level user management; admin user can create many operang account and dene their operang permission, which includes the permission to access any channel;
● Completeness of operaon, alarm, excepons and log wring and searching;
● Manually triggering and clearing alarms;
- Imporng and exporng of conguraon le of devices;
● Geng cameras type informaon automacally;
- Unlock paern for device login for the admin;
● Clear-text password available;
● GUID le can be exported for password reseng;
- Mulple connected analog cameras supporting Turbo HD or AHD signal can be upgraded simultaneously via DVR.

Network Funcons

● Self-adapve 100M or 1000M network interface;
- IPv6 is supported;
- TCP/IP protocol, PPPoE, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, SNMP (for 7300HQHI/HUHI and 9000HUHI series DVR), SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™ and HTTPS are supported;
● Supports access by Hik-Connect. If you enable Hik-Connect, the device will remind you the internet access risk and ask you to confirm the “Terms of Service” and “Privacy Statement” before enabling the service. You should create a vericaon code to connect to the Hik-Connect;
● TCP, UDP and RTP for unicast;
● Auto/Manual port mapping by UPnPTM;
- Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking the record les, and downloading les broken transfer resume;

• Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters;
• Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status;
• Remote keyboard operaon;
• Remote HDD formang and program upgrading;
• Remote system restart and shutdown;
  ● Supports upgrading via remote FTP server;
  ● RS-485 transparent channel transmission;
• Alarm and excepon informaon can be sent to the remote host;
  ● Remotely start/stop recording;
  ● Remotely start/stop alarm output;
• Remote PTZ control;
  ● Two-way audio and voice broadcasts;
  ● Output bandwidth limit congorable;
• Embedded WEB server;
• If DHCP is enabled, you can enable DNS DHCP or disable it and edit the Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server.

Development Scalability

• SDK for Windows and Linux system;
  ● Source code of applicaon soware for demo;
  ● Development support and training for applicaon system.

Table of Contents

Product Key Features....6

Chapter 1 Introduction....19

1.1 Front Panel 19
1.2 IR Remote Control Operaons.... 27
1.3 USB Mouse Operaon....30
1.4 Input Method Descripon....32
1.5 Rear Panel....32

Chapter 2 Getting Started....39

2.1 Starng Up and Shung Down the DVR 39
2.2 Acvang the Device 40
2.3 Using the Unlock Paern for Login 42

2.3.1 Configuring the Unlock Paern 42
2.3.2 Logging in via Unlock Paern 43

2.4 Basic Conguraon in Startup Wizard 45
2.5 Login and Logout .... 50

2.5.1 User Login 50
2.5.2 User Logout....51

2.6 Reseng Your Password 51
2.7 Adding and Connecng the IP Cameras....53

2.7.1 Acvang the IP Camera 53
2.7.2 Adding the Online IP Camera....54
2.7.3 Eding the Connected IP Camera 58

2.8 Connecng PoC Cameras 59
2.9 Configuring Signal Input Channel 60
2.10 Conguring 5 MP Long Distance Transmission....61

Chapter 3 Live View ......63

3.1 Introduction of Live View....63
3.2 Operaons in Live View Mode 63

3.2.1 Using the Mouse in Live View....65
3.2.2 Switching Main/Aux Output 66
3.2.3 Quick Seng Toolbar in Live View Mode....67

3.3 Channel-Zero Encoding 70
3.4 Adjusng Live View Setngs 70

3.5 Manual Video Quality Diagnoscs 72

Chapter 4 PTZ Controls....74

4.1 Configuring PTZ Sengs 74
4.2 Setng PTZ Presets, Patrols and Paerns 76

4.2.1 Customizing Presets 76
4.2.2 Calling Presets....77
4.2.3 Customizing Patrols....77
4.2.4 Calling Patrols 78
4.2.5 Customizing Paerns....79
4.2.6 Calling Patterns 80
4.2.7 Customizing Linear Scan Limit 80
4.2.8 Calling Linear Scan....81
4.2.9 One-Touch Park 82

4.3 PTZ Control Panel....83

Chapter 5 Recording and Capture Settings 85

5.1 Configuring Encoding Parameters 85
5.2 Configuring Recording and Capture Schedule....91
5.3 Configuring Moon Detecon Recording and Capture 94
5.4 Configuring Alarm Triggered Recording and Capture 95
5.5 Configuring Event Recording and Capture 97
5.6 Configuring Manual Recording and Connous Capture 99
5.7 Configuring Holiday Recording and Capture 99
5.8 Configuring Redundant Recording and Capture....101
5.9 Configuring HDD Group 102
5.10 Files Protecon....103
5.11 One-Key Enabling and Disabling H.264+/H.265+ for Analog Cameras.... 106
5.12 Conguring 1080P Lite....107

Chapter 6 Playback ....109

6.1 Playing Back Record Files 109

6.1.1 Instant Playback 109
6.1.2 Playing Back by Normal Search.... 109
6.1.3 Playing Back by Event Search.... 112
6.1.4 Playing Back by Tag 114
6.1.5 Playing Back by Smart Search 117

6.1.6 Playing Back by System Logs.... 121

6.1.7 Playing Back by Sub-Periods 123

6.1.8 Playing Back External File 124

6.1.9 Playing Back Pictures.... 124

6.2 Auxiliary Funcons of Playback 126

6.2.1 Playing Back Frame by Frame 126

6.2.2 Digital Zoom....126

6.2.3 Reverse Playback of Mul-Channel....127

6.2.4 File Management 127

Chapter 7 Backup....129

7.1 Backing up Record Files 129

7.1.1 Backing up by Normal Video/Picture Search 129

7.1.2 Backing up by Event Search.... 131

7.1.3 Backing up Video Clips 132

7.2 Managing Backup Devices.... 133

Chapter 8 Alarm Settings .... 135

8.1 Setng Moon Detecon.... 135

8.2 Setng PIR Camera Alarm 138

8.3 Setng Sensor Alarms 139

8.4 Detecng Video Loss 142

8.5 Detecng Video Tampering.... 143

8.6 Setng All-day Video Quality Diagnoscs....145

8.7 Handling Excepons.... 146

8.8 Setng Alarm Response Acons....148

Chapter 9 POS Configuration .... 151

9.1 Configuring POS Setngs.... 151

9.2 Configuring Overlay Channel....156

9.3 Configuring POS Alarm.... 157

Chapter 10 VCA Alarm .... 159

10.1 Face Detecon....159

10.2 Vehicle Detecon.... 161

10.3 Line Crossing Detecon.... 162

10.4 Intrusion Detecon 164

10.5 Region Entrance Detecon.... 165

10.6 Region Exing Detecon 167
10.7 Loitering Detecon 167
10.8 People Gathering Detecon 167
10.9 Fast Moving Detecon 168
10.10 Parking Detecon.... 168
10.11 Unaended Baggage Detecon.... 168
10.12 Object Removal Detecon 169
10.13 Audio Excepon Detecon.... 169
10.14 Defocus Detecon.... 170
10.15 Sudden Scene Change 171
10.16 PIR Alarm 171

Chapter 11 VCA Search....173

11.1 Face Search 173
11.2 Behavior Search 175
11.3 Plate Search 176
11.4 People Counng.... 177
11.5 Heat Map.... 178

Chapter 12 Network Settings....180

12.1 Conguring General Sengs.... 180

12.2 Conguring Advanced Sengs.... 181

12.2.1 Conguring PPPoE Sengs.... 181
12.2.2 Conguring Hik-Connect 181
12.2.3 Conguring DDNS.... 184
12.2.4 Conguring NTP Server 185
12.2.5 Conguring NAT 186
12.2.6 Conguring More Sengs.... 188
12.2.7 Conguring HTTPS Port 189
12.2.8 Conguring Email 191
12.2.9 Checking Network Trac.... 192

12.3 Conguring Network Detecon.... 193

12.3.1 Tesng Network Delay and Packet Loss 193
12.3.2 Exporng Network Packet 194
12.3.3 Checking Network Status.... 194
12.3.4 Checking Network Stascs 195

Chapter 13 RAID....197

13.1 Conguring Array 197

13.1.2 Enable RAID 198

13.1.3 One-touch Conguraon.... 199

13.1.4 Manually Creang Array 200

13.2 Rebuilding Array 202

13.2.2 Automacally Rebuilding Array 203

13.2.3 Manually Rebuilding Array 203

13.3 Deleng Array....204

13.4 Checking and Editing Firmware 205

Chapter 14 HDD Management ...... 206

14.1 Inializing HDDs 206

14.2 Managing Network HDD 207

14.3 Managing HDD Group 209

14.3.1 Setng HDD Groups 209

14.3.2 Setng HDD Property 211

14.4 Conguring Quota Mode 212

14.5 Conguring Cloud Storage....213

14.6 Conguring Disk Clone 215

14.7 Checking HDD Status.... 217

14.8 Checking S.M.A.R.T Informaon 218

14.9 Detecng Bad Sector 218

14.10 Conguring HDD Error Alarms 219

Chapter 15 Camera Settings....221

15.1 Conguring OSD Sengs 221

15.2 Conguring Privacy Mask 222

15.3 Conguring Video Parameters 223

15.3.1 Conguring Image Sengs....223

15.3.2 Conguring Camera Parameters Setngs.... 225

Chapter 16 DVR Management and Maintenance....227

16.1 Viewing System Informaon 227

16.2 Searching Log Files.... 227

16.3 Imporng/Exporng IP Camera Info....230

16.4 Imporng/Exporng Conguraon Files 230

16.5 Upgrading System 231

16.5.1 Upgrading by Local Backup Device.... 231

16.5.2 Upgrading by FTP 231

16.6 Upgrading Camera 231

16.7 Restoring Default Sengs 232

Chapter 17 Others....233

17.1 Conguring General Sengs....233

17.2 Conguring RS-232 Serial Port 234

17.3 Conguring DST Sengs 235

17.4 Conguring More Sengs.... 235

17.5 Managing User Accounts.... 237

17.5.1 Adding a User 237

17.5.2 Deleng a User 240

17.5.3 Eding a User 240

Chapter 18 Appendix....244

18.1 Specicaons....244

18.1.1 DS-7100HQHI-K1 244

18.1.2 DS-7200HQHI-K1 247

18.1.3 DS-7200HQHI-K2 250

18.1.4 DS-7200HUHI-K1 252

18.1.5 DS-7200HUHI-K2 254

18.1.6 DS-7200HQHI-K/P 257

18.1.7 DS-7200HUHI-K/P 260

18.1.8 DS-7300HQHI-K4 262

18.1.9 DS-7300HUHI-K4 265

18.1.10 DS-9000HUHI-K8 267

18.1.11 DS-7204HTHI-K1 270

18.1.12 DS-7200HTHI-K2 272

18.2 Glossary 275

18.3 Troubleshoong....276

18.4 Summary of Changes 279

18.4.5 Version 3.5.0 281
18.5 List of Compatible Hikvision IP Cameras....282
18.6 List of Compatible Third-Party IP Cameras.... 283
18.7 List of Applicable Power Adapter.... 283

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Front Panel

Front Panel 1:

1 2 3 HIKVISION

Figure 1-1 Front Panel of DS-7100HQHI-K1

Table 1-1 DS-7100HQHI-K1 Front Panel Descripon

No.	Icon	Description
1		Turns red when DVR is powered up.
2		Turns red when data is being read from or wrien to HDD.
3		Flickers blue when network conncon is funconing properly.

Front Panel 2:

HIKVISION 7 2 4 8 3 6 1 5 KIKBO KAKO BRSO AARO XBD TVAC 1 2 ABC 3 DET 4 GH 5 JL SET MNG N 8 BC 9 HC 10 BT 6 MNC 7 FORS 8 TUT 9 HWYZ 0 RUN RC RS PREA A

Figure 1-2 Front Panel of DS-7300HQHI-K4 and DS-7300HUHI-K4

Table 1-2 DS-7300HQHI-K4 Front Panel Descripon

No.	Name		Function Description
1	POWER		Turns green when DVR is powered up.
	READY		Turns green, indicang that the DVR is funconing properly.
	STATUS		Turns green when device is controlled by an IR remote.
			Turns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same me.
	ALARM		Turns red when a sensor alarm is detected.
	HDD		Flickers in red when data is being read from or wrien to HDD.
	Tx/Rx		Flickers in green when network conncon is funconing properly.
2	DVD-R/W		Slot for DVD-R/W.
3	Composite Keys	SHIFT	Switches between the numeric or leer input and funcons of the composite keys. (Input leer or numbers when the light is out; Realize funcons when the light is red.)
		1/MENU	Enters numeral “1”;Accesses the main menu interface.
		2/ABC/F1	Enters numeral “2”;
			Enters leers “ABC”;
			The F1 buon when used in a list eld will select all items in the list;
			Turns on/o PTZ light in PTZ Control mode, and use it to zoom out the image;
			Switches between main and spot video output in live
			view or playback mode.
		3/DEF/F2	Enters numeral “3”;
			Enters leers “DEF”;
			Uses the F2 buon is used to change the tab pages;
			Zooms in the image in PTZ control mode.
		4/GHI/ESC	Enters numeral “4”;
			Enters leers “GHI”;
			Exits and back to the previous menu.
		5/JKL/EDIT	Enters numeral “5”;
			Enters leers “JKL”;
			Deletes characters before cursor;
			Check the checkbox and select the ON/OFF switch;
			Starts/stops record clipping in playback.
		6/MNO/PLAY	Enters numeral “6”;
			Enters leers “MNO”;
			Accesses to playback interface in Playback mode.
		7/PQRS/REC	Enters numeral “7”;
			Enters leers “PQRS”;
			Accesses to manual record interface; Manually enables/disables record.
		8/TUV/PTZ	Enters numeral “8”;Enters leers “TUV”;
			Accesses PTZ control interface.
		9/WXYZ/PREV	Enters numeral “9”;
			Enters leers “WXYZ”;
			Mul-channel display in live view.
		0/A	Enters numeral “0”;
			Shis the input methods in the eding text eld. (Upper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric input).
4	DIRECTION		Navigates between dierent elds and items in menus.
			Uses the Up and Down buons to speed up and slow down the playing of video les in Playback mode.The Le and Right buon will select the next and previous record les.
			Cycles through channels in Live View mode.
			Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ control mode.
	ENTER		Conrms selecon in any of the menu modes.
			Checks the checkbox.
			Plays or pauses the playing of video les in Playback mode.
			Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame Playback mode.
			Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode.
5	POWER	Power on/o switch.
6	JOG SHUTTLE Control	Moves the acve selecon up and down in a menu.
		Cycles through dierent channels in live view mode.
		Jumps 30s forward/backward in video les in the playback mode.
		Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ control mode.
		Moves the acve selecon up and down in a menu.
7	USB Interface	Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for additional devices such as USB mouse and USB Hard Disk Drive (HDD).
8	IR Receiver	Receiver for IR remote control.

Front Panel 3

1 HIKVISION 5 3 8 9 10 2 4 6 7 8 9 10 HIKVISION ABR BTF 0H AU BAC FBS TIN BWC 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ESC MPT PUY GA GNDT SACB AUTO BLDCM+ MDCM+ MDC GNDC FL FL BLDCM+ MDC+ PDS WFDI R LEDT ACK QDQDM+ PDCS- IWD

Figure 1-3 Front Panel of DS-9000HUHI-K8

Table 1-3 DS-9000HUHI-K8 Front Panel Descripon

No.	Name	Function Description
1	ALARM	Turns red when a sensor alarm is detected.
	READY	Turns blue, indicang that the DVR is funconing properly.
	STATUS	Turns blue when device is controlled by an IR remote.
		Turns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same me.
	HDD	Flickers in red when data is being read from or wrien to HDD.
	MODEM	Flickers in blue when network conncon is funconing properly.
	Tx/Rx	Turns blue when the device is in armed status; at this me, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected.
	GUARD	Turns o when the device is unarmed. The arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and holding on the ESC buon for more than 3 seconds in live view mode.
		Turns red when a sensor alarm is detected.
2	IR Receiver	Receiver for IR remote
3	Front Panel Lock	Lock or unlock the panel by the key.
4	DVD-R/W	Slot for DVD-R/W.
5	Alphanumeric Buons	Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or PTZ contro mode.
		Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode.
		Switches between dierent channels in playback mode.
		Turns blue when the corresponding channel is recording; turns re when the channel is in network transmission status; turns pink when the channel is recording and transming.
6	USB Interfaces	Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for additional devices such as USB mouse and USB Hard Disk Drive (HDD).
7	ESC	Returns to the previous menu.
		Presses for arming/disarming the device in live view mode.
	REC/SHOT	Enters the Manual Record sengs menu.
		Presses this buon followed by a numeric buon to call a PTZ preset
		in PTZ control sengs.
		Turns audio on/o in the playback mode.
	PLAY/AUTO	Enters the playback mode.
		Automacally scans in the PTZ control menu.
	ZOOM+	Zooms in the PTZ camera in the PTZ control seng.
	A/FOCUS+	Adjusts focus in the PTZ Control menu.
		Switches between input methods (upper and lower case alphabet symbols and numeric input).
	EDIT/IRIS+	Edits text elds. When eding text elds, it also deletes the character in front of the cursor.
		Checks the checkbox in the checkbox elds.
		Adjusts the iris of the camera in PTZ control mode.
		Generates video clips for backup in playback mode.
		Enters/exits the folder of USB device and eSATA HDD.
	MAIN/SPOT/ZOOM-	Switches between main and spot output.
		Zooms out the image in PTZ control mode.
	F1/ LIGHT	Selects all items on the list when used in a list eld.
		Turns on/o PTZ light (if applicable) in PTZ control mode.
		Switches between play and reverse play in playback mode.
	F2/ AUX	Cycles through tab pages.
		Switches between channels in synchronous playback mode.
	MENU/WIPER	Returns to the Main menu (aer successful login).
		Presses and holds the buon for ve seconds to turn o audible key beep.
		Starts wiper (if applicable) in PTZ control mode.
		Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode.
	PREV/FOCUS-	Switches between single screen and mul-screen mode.
		Adjusts the focus in conjuncon with the A/FOCUS+ buon in PTZ control mode.
	PTZ/IRIS-	Enters the PTZ Control mode.
		Adjusts the iris of the PTZ camera in PTZ control mode.
8	DIRECTION	Navigates between dierent elds and items in menus.
		Uses the Up and Down buons to speed up and slow down the playing of video les in Playback mode.The Le and Right buon will select the next and previous record les.
		Cycles through channels in Live View mode.
		Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ control mode.
	ENTER	Conrms selecon in any of the menu modes.
		Checks the checkbox.
		Plays or pauses the playing of video les in Playback mode.
		Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame Playback mode.
		Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode.
9	JOG SHUTTLE Control	Moves the acve selecon up and down in a menu.
		Cycles through dierent channels in live view mode.
		Jumps 30s forward/backward in video les in the playback mode.
		Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ control mode.
10	POWER ON/OFF	Power on/o switch.

Front Panel 4:

HIKVISION 1 2 3 4 5

Figure 1-4 Front Panel of Other Models

Table 1-4 Front Panel of Other Models Descripon

No.	Icon	Description
1		Turns white when DVR is powered up.
2		Turns red when data is being read from or wrien to HDD.
3		Flashes white when the network is well-connected.
4		Receiver for IR remote control.
5	USB Interface	Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for additional devices such as USB mouse and USB Hard Disk Drive (HDD).

1.2 IR Remote Control Operations

The DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control, shown in Figure 1-2.

NOTE

Baeries (2×AAA) must be installed before operaon.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ABC 2 GHI 3 JKL 4 PQRS 5 TUV 6 WXYZ 7 MENU 8 FSC 9 PLAY 0 REC PTZ PREV

Figure 1-5 Remote Control

The keys on the remote control closely resemble the ones found on the front panel. Refer to Table 1-5, they include:

Table 1-5 Descripon of the IR Remote Control Buons

No.	Name	Description
1	POWER	Power on/o the device.
		Power on/o the device by pressing and holding the buon for 5 seconds.
2	MENU Buon	Press the buon to return to the main menu (aer successful login).
		Press and hold the buon for 5 seconds will turn o audible key beep.
		In PTZ Control mode, the MENU buon will start wiper (if applicable).
		In Playback mode, it is used to show/hide the control interface.
3	REC Buon	Enter the Manual Record seng menu.In PTZ control sengs, press the buon and then you can call a PTZ preset by pressing Numeric buon.
		It is also used to turn audio on/o in the Playback mode.
4	DIRECTION Buon	Navigate between dierent elds and items in menus.
		In the Playback mode, the Up and Down buon is used to speed up and slow down recorded video. The Le and Right buon will select the next and previous record les.
		In Live View mode, these buons can be used to cycle through channels.
		In PTZ control mode, it can control the movement of the PTZ camera.
	ENTER Buon	Conrm selecon in any of the menu modes.
		It can also be used to ck checkbox elds.
		In Playback mode, it can be used to play or pause the video.
		In single-frame Playback mode, pressing the buon will advance the video by a single frame.
5	PTZ Buon	In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto switch.
6	DEV	Enables/Disables Remote Control.
7	Alphanumeric Buons	Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or PTZ Control mode.
		Input numbers and characters in Edit mode.
		Switch between dierent channels in the Playback mode.
8	ESC Buon	Back to the previous menu.
		Press for Arming/disarming the device in Live View mode.
9	PLAY Buon	The buon is used to enter the All-day Playback mode.It is also used to auto scan in the PTZ Control menu.
10	PREV Buon	Switch between single screen and mul-screen mode.
		In PTZ Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in conjuncon with the A/FOCUS+ buon.

Troubleshoong Remote Control:

NOTE

Make sure you have installed baeries properly in the remote control. And you have to aim the remote control at the IR receiver on the front panel.

If there is no response aer you press any buon on the remote, follow the procedure below to troubleshoot.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > General > More Sengs by operang the front control panel or the mouse.

Step 2 Check and remember the DVR No. The default DVR No. is 255. This number valid for all IR remote controls.

Step 3 Press the DEV buon on the remote control.

Step 4 Enter the DVR No. in step 2.

Step 5 Press the ENTER buon on the remote.

If the Status indicator on the front panel turns blue, the remote control is operang properly. If the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is sll no response from the remote, please check the following:

Step 1 Baeries are installed correctly and the polaries of the baeries are not reversed.

Step 2 Baeries are fresh and not out of charge.

Step 3 IR receiver is not obstructed.

If the remote sll cannot funcon properly, please change the remote and try again, or contact the device provider.

1.3 USB Mouse Operation

A regular 3-buon (Le/Right/Scroll-wheel) USB mouse can also be used with this DVR. To use a USB mouse:

Step 1 Plug USB mouse into one of the USB interfaces on the front panel of the DVR.

Step 2 The mouse should automatically be detected. If in a rare case that the mouse is not detected, the possible reason may be that the two devices are not compatible, please refer to the recommended the device list from your provider.

The operaon of the mouse:

Table 1-6 Descripon of the Mouse Control

Name	Action	Description
Le-Click	Single-Click	Live view: Select channel and show the quick set menu.Menu: Select and enter.
	Double-Click	Live view: Switch between single-screen and mul-screen.
	Drag	PTZ control: Wheeling.Privacy mask and moon detecon: Select target area.Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.Live view: Drag channel/me bar.
Right-Click	Single-Click	Live view: Show menu.Menu: Exit current menu to upper level menu.
Scroll-Wheel	Scrolling up	Live view: Previous screen.Menu: Previous item.
	Scrolling down	Live view: Next screen.Menu: Next item.

1.4 Input Method Description

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 q w e r t y u i o p a s d f g h j k l ↑ z x c v b n m ←x 123/..

Figure 1-6 So Keyboard

Descripon of the buons on the so keyboard:

Table 1-7 Descripon of the So Keyboard Icons

Icon	Description	Icon	Description
	Number		English leer
[807A]	Lowercase/Uppercase		Backspace
ABC	Switch the keyboard	[2084]	Space
	Posioning the cursor	[AW9G]	Enter
[8267]	Symbols	[82YH]	Reserved

1.5 Rear Panel

NOTE

The rear panel vaires according to dierent models. Please refer to the actual product. The following gures are for reference only.

Rear Panel 1:

VIDEO IN HDMI VGA AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT LAN & USB 12V 2 7 11

Figure 1-7 Rear Panel of DS-7100HQHI-K1

Rear Panel 2:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT HDMI VGA AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT LAN RS-488 12V POWER IN-ALARM-OUT

Figure 1-8 Rear Panel of DS-7200HUHI-K

Rear Panel 3:

12 4 13 3 2 10 VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT ALARM VGA AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT LAN RS-485 POWER 1 6 5 7 8 9 11

Figure 1-9 Rear Panel of DS-7200HUHI-K/P

Rear Panel 4:

13 4 12 VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT +G- H2R7M VGA 3 2 AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT LAN RS-85 10 POWER 1 6 5 7 8 9 11

Figure 1-10 Rear Panel of DS-7200HTHI-K1

Rear Panel 5:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT HORN VRA AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT LAN RES-RES TEV-VS POWER IN-ALARM-OUT

Figure 1-11 Rear Panel of DS-7200HTHI-K2
Rear Panel 6:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN VIA AUDIO LAN RESURS POWER

Figure 1-12 Rear Panel of DS-7200HQHI-K

Rear Panel 7:

1 6 5 4 3 7 8 9 10 POWER 11

Figure 1-13 Rear Panel of DS-7200HQHI-K/P

Table 1-8 Descripon of Rear Panel 1-7

No.	Item	Description
1	VIDEO IN	BNC interface for Turbo HD and analog video input.
2	AUDIO IN	RCA connector
3	AUDIO OUT	RCA connector.
4	VGA	DB15 connector for VGA output. Display local video output and menu.
5	HDMI	HDMI video output connector.
6	USB Interface	Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional devices.
7	Network Interface	Connector for network
8	RS-485 Interface	Connector for RS-485 devices.
9	Power Supply	48 VDC or 12 VDC.
10	Power Switch	Switch for turning on/o the device.
11	GND	Ground
12	VIDEO OUT	BNC connector for video output.
13	Alarm In/Out	Connector for alarm input and output.

Rear Panel 8:

3 7 13 2 1514 10 11 AUDIO B AUDIO OUT LINT IN VDDA RS-232 VDA LAN RS-485 RS ALATIN OUT ALATIN IN 1 4 5 6 8 9 12

Figure 1-14 Rear Panel of DS-7300HQHI-K

Table 1-9 Description of DS-7300HQHI-K Rear Panel

No.	Item	Description
1	VIDEO IN	BNC interface for Turbo HD and analog video input.
2	VIDEO OUT	BNC connector for video output.
3	AUDIO IN	RCA connector
4	USB Port	Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional devices.
5	HDMI	HDMI video output connector.
6	VGA	DB15 connector for VGA output. Display local video output and menu.
7	AUDIO OUT	RCA connector.
8	Network Interface	Connector for network
9	RS-485 and Alarm Interface	Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect to R+ and R- pins of PTZ receiver respectively.
		D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the rst DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR.Connector for alarm input.
		Connector for alarm output.
10	Power Supply	100 to 240 VAC power supply.
11	Power Switch	Switch for turning on/o the device.
12	GND	Ground
13	LINE IN	BNC connector for audio input.
14	eSATA	Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVD-RW.
15	RS-232 Interface	Connector for RS-232 devices.

Rear Panel 9:

3 7 13 2 6 1514 10 AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT LINE IN HOTC 2 HOTC 1 VISA RS-222 USB USB ALLWIND IN 1 4 5 8 9 12 11

Figure 1-15 Rear Panel of DS-7300HUHI-K4

Rear Panel 10:

3 7 13 6 14 15 16 17 10 LOOP OUT AUDIO OUT LINE IN eDATA ALARM OUT AUDIO VDDOUT VDD OUT HDMI HDMI LAN2 LAN1 ALARM IN 1 4 2 5 8 9 12 11

Figure 1-16 Rear Panel of DS-9000HUHI-K8

Table 1-10 Descripon of DS-7300HUHI-K4/DS-9000HUHI-K8 Rear Panel

No.	Item	Description
1	VIDEO IN	BNC interface for Turbo HD and analog video input.
2	VIDEO OUT	BNC connector for video output.
3	AUDIO IN/LOOP OUT (for DS-9000HUHI-K8)	RCA connector
4	USB Port	Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional devices.
5	HDMI1/VGA	Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local video output and menu.
6	HDMI2	HDMI2 video output connector.
7	AUDIO OUT	RCA connector.
8	Network Interface	Connector for network
9	RS-485 and Alarm Interface	Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins connect to R+ and R-pins of PTZ receiver respectively.
		D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For cascading devices, the rst DVR's D+, D- pin should be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR.
		Connector for alarm input.
		Connector for alarm output.
10	Power Supply	100 to 240 VAC power supply.
11	Power Switch	Switch for turning on/o the device.
12	GND	Ground
13	LINE IN	BNC connector for audio input.
14	eSATA	Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVD-RW.
15	RS-232 Interface	Connector for RS-232 devices.
16	ALARM OUT	Connector for alarm output.
17	AUDIO IN (for DS-9000HUHI-K8)	RCA connector

Chapter 2 Getting Started

2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR

Purpose

Proper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.

Before you start

Check that the voltage of the extra power supply is the same with the DVR's requirement, and the ground conncon is working properly.

Starng up the DVR

Step 1 Check the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) be used in conjunction with the device.

Step 2 Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the Power indicator LED should turn on indicang that the unit begins to start up.

Step 3 Aer startup, the Power indicator LED remains on.

Shung down the DVR

Step 1 Go to Menu > Shutdown.

Shutdown Logout Shutdown Reboot Cancel

Figure 2-1 Shutdown Menu

Step 2 Click Shutdown.

Step 3 Click Yes.

Step 4 Turn o the power switch on the rear panel when the note appears.

Please power off!

Figure 2-2 Shutdown Tips

Reboong the DVR

While in the Shutdown menu (Figure 2-1), you can also reboot the DVR.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Shutdown.

Step 2 Click Logout to log out or the Reboot to reboot the DVR.

2.2 Activating the Device

Purpose

For the rst-me access, you need to acvate the device by seng an admin password. No operaon is allowed before acvaon. You can also acvate the device via Web Browser, SADP or Client Soware.

Step 1 Input the same password in the text eld of Create New Password and Conrm New Password.

Step 2 In the IP Camera Acvaon text eld, enter the password to acvate the IP camera (s) connected to the device.

Activation User Name admin Create New Pass... ***** Confirm New Pass... ***** IP Camera Activation: ***** ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Cancel

Figure 2-3 Sengs Admin Password

WARNING

STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-We highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case leers, lower case leers, numbers, and special characters.) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly, especially in the high security system, reseng the password monthly or weekly can beer protect your product.

Step 3 Click OK to save the password and acvate the device.

NOTE

- Clear-text password is supported. Click the 📄 on and you can see the clear text of the password. Click the icon again and the content of the password restores invisible.

- For the old version device, if you update it to the new version, the following dialog box will pop up once the device starts up. You can click YES and follow the wizard to set a strong password.

Warning Admin password is weak. Please use a strong password to ensure your information security. Continue? YES NO

Figure 2-4 Warning

Step 4 Aer the device is acvated, the Aenon box pops up as below.

Attention The device is activated. Properly keep your password. Export the GUID file for password resetting? Yes No

Figure 2-5 Aenon

Step 5 (Oponal) Click Yes to export GUID. The Reset Password interface pops up. Click Export to export GUID to the USB ash drive for password reseng.

Reset Password Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play 1.bmp $750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:47:04 10.bmp $750.06KB File 09-05-2016 10:20:07 11.bmp $750.06KB File 09-05-2016 10:20:15 12.bmp $750.06KB File 09-05-2016 10:20:19 13.bmp $750.06KB File 09-05-2016 11:47:01 14.bmp $750.06KB File 09-05-2016 11:47:08 15.bmp $750.06KB File 09-05-2016 11:47:13 Free Space 14.28GB New Folder Expert Back

Figure 2-6 Export GUID

Step 6 Aer exporng GUID, the Attenon box pops up as below. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

Attention Duplicate the password to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Yes No

Figure 2-7 Duplicate the Password

2.3 Using the Unlock Pattern for Login

Purpose

For the admin, you can congregate the unlock paern for device login.

2.3.1 Configuring the Unlock Pattern

Aer the device is acvated, you can enter the following interface to conjure the device unlock paern.

Set Unlock Pattern Draw the unlock pattern first.

Figure 2-8 Set Unlock Paern

Step 1 Use the mouse to draw a paern among the 9 dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the paern is done.

Set Unlock Pattern Release you finger when done.

Figure 2-9 Draw the Paern

NOTE

• Connect at least 4 dots to draw the paern.
  ● Each dot can be connected for once only.

Step 2 Draw the same paern again to conrm it. When the two paerns match, the paern is congured successfully.

Set Unlock Pattern Draw pattern again to confirm.

Figure 2-10 Conrm the Paern

NOTE

If the two paerns are dierent, you must set the paern again.

Set Unlock Pattern The two patterns are different. Try again.

Figure 2-11 Reset the Paern

2.3.2 Logging in via Unlock Pattern

NOTE

• Only the admin user has the permission to unlock the device.
• Please congregate the paern rst before unlocking. Please refer to Chapter 2.3.1 Conguring the Unlock Paern.

Step 1 Right click the mouse on the screen and select the menu to enter the interface.

Unlock admin Draw the unlock pattern first. Forget My P... Switch User

Figure 2-12 Draw the Unlock Paern

Step 2 Draw the pre-dened paern to unlock to enter the menu operaon.

i NOTE

● You can right click the mouse to log in via the normal mode.
- If you have forgoen your pattern, you can select the Forget My Pattern or Switch User opon to enter the normal login dialog box.
- When the paern you draw is dierent from the paern you have congured, you should try again.
- If you have drawn the wrong paern for 7 mes, the account will be locked for 1 minute.

Login User Name admin Password ******** Forget Pa... OK Cancel

Figure 2-13 Normal Login Dialog Box

Login User Name admin Password The account is locked. Please try again 51s later. Forget Pa... OK Cancel

Figure 2-14 Lock the Account

2.4 Basic Configuration in Startup Wizard

Purpose

By default, the Setup Wizard starts once the device has loaded. You can follow it to complete the basic conguraon.

Selecng the language:

Step 1 Select the language from the drop-down list.

Step 2 Click Apply buon.

Language System Language English

Figure 2-15 Language Conguraon

Operang the Setup Wizard:

Step 1 The Start Wizard can walk you through some important sengs of the device. If you don't want to use the Start Wizard at that moment, click Exit. You can also choose to use the Start Wizard next me by leaving the "Start wizard when device starts?" checkbox checked.

Wizard ✓ Start wizard when device starts? Next Exit

Figure 2-16 Start Wizard Interface

Step 2 Click Next buon to enter the Change the Password interface.

1) Input the Admin Password.
2) (Oponal) Check the checkbox of New Admin Password, input the New Password and conrm it.

3) (Oponal) Check the checkbox of Enable Paern Unlock and draw the unlock paern. Or click ☐ of Draw Unlock Pattern to change the paern. Refer to Chapter 2.3 Using the Unlock Paern for Login for reference.
4) (Oponal) Click of Export GUID to export GUID to the connected USB ash drive for reseng password. Refer to Chapter 17.5.3 Editing a User for reference.

Wizard Admin Password New Admin Password New Password Confirm Enable Pattern Unlock Draw Unlock Pattern Export GUID Valid password range [0-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. Previous Next Exit

Figure 2-17 Change the Password

Step 3 Click Next button and the Aenon box pops up as shown below. Click Yes to duplicate the password of the device to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Or click No to enter the Date and Time Sengs interface.

Attention Duplicate the password to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Yes No

Figure 2-18 Duplicate the Password

Wizard Time Zone (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Urumqi, Singapore Date Format MM-DD-YYYY System Date 05-08-2013 System Time 15:22:59 Previous Next Exit

Figure 2-19 Date and Time Sengs

Step 4 After the me sengs, click Next buon to enter the General Network Setup Wizard interface as shown below.

Wizard Working Mode Net Fault-tolerance Select NIC bond0 NIC Type 10M/100M/1000M Self-adaptive Enable DHCP IPv4 Address 10 .16 .5 17 IPv4 Subnet Mask 255 .255 .255 .0 IPv4 Default Gateway 10 .16 .5 254 Enable DNS DHCP Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server Main NIC LAN1 Previous Next Exit

Figure 2-20 General Network Conguraon

Step 5 Click Next button aer you congured the basic network parameters.

Then you will enter the Hik-Connect interface. Congure the Hik-Connect according to your need. Refer to Chapter 12.2.2 Conguring Hik-Connect for detailed operations.

Wizard Enable Access Type Hik-Connect Server Address dev.hik-connect.com Custom Enable Stream Encryption Verification Code Status Offline Previous Next Exit

Figure 2-21 Hik-Connect Conguraon

Step 6 Click Next buon to enter the Advanced Network Parameters interface. You can enable DDNS and set other ports according to your need.

Wizard Server Port 8000 HTTP Port 80 RTSP Port 554 Enable UPnP ✓ Enable DDNS ✓ DDNS Type DynDNS Area/Country Custom - Server Address Device Domain Name Status DDNS is disabled. User Name Password Previous Next Exit

Figure 2-22 Set Advanced Network Parameters

Step 7 For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series, click Next and you can enter the RAID conguraon interface. Check the checkbox of Enable RAID to take this funcon into eect.

Wizard Enable RAID

Figure 2-23 RAID Conguraon

Step 8 Click Next buon aer conguring the advanced network parameters, which will take you to the HDD Management interface as shown below.

Wizard Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space 1 931.52GB Normal R/W Local 560.00GB Init Previous Next Exit

Figure 2-24 HDD Management

Step 9 To initialize the HDD, click the Init buon. Inialization will remove all the data saved in the HDD.

Step 10 Click Next button to enter the IP Camera Management interface.

Step 11 Add the IP camera.

1) Click Search to search the online IP Camera. The Security status shows whether it is acve or inacve. Before adding the camera, make sure the IP camera to be added is in acve status. If the camera is in inacve status, you can click the inacve icon of the camera to set the password to acvate it. You can also select mulple cameras from the list and click the One-touch Acvate to acvate the cameras in batch.
2) Click the Add to add the camera.
3) (Oponal) Check the checkbox of Enable H.265 (For Inial Access) for the connected IP camera supporting H.265. Then the IP camera will be encoded with H.265.

Wizard No. IP Address Security Amount of C... Device Model Protocol 1 10.16.2.109 Active 1 DS-2CD5126...HIKVISION 2 10.16.2.222 Active 1 DS-2CD2312-I HIKVISION One-touch Activ... Add Search Enable H.265 (For Initial Access) Previous Next Exit

Figure 2-25 IP Camera Management

Step 12 Aer nishing IP Camera setngs, click Next to enter the Record Sengs interface.

Step 13 Click and you can enable the connuous recording or moon detecon recording for all channels of the device.

Wizard Continuous Motion Detection Previous OK Exit

Figure 2-26 Record Sengs

Step 14 Click OK to complete the wizard sengs.

2.5 Login and Logout

2.5.1 User Login

Purpose

You have to log in to the device before operang the menu and other funcons

Step 1 Select the User Name in the drop-down list.

Login User Name admin Password ******** Forget Pa... OK Cancel

Figure 2-27 Login Interface

Step 2 Input the Password.

Step 3 Click OK to log in.

NOTE

In the Login interface, for the admin, if you have entered the wrong password for 7 mes, the account will be locked for 60 seconds. For the operator, if you have entered the wrong password for 5 mes, the account will be locked for 60 seconds.

Attention Incorrect password. You still have 6 chances. Please try again. OK

Figure 2-28 User Account Protecon for the Admin

Attention Incorrect password. You still have 4 chances. Please try again. OK

Figure 2-29 User Account Protecon for the Operator

2.5.2 User Logout

Purpose

Aer logging out, the monitor turns to the live view mode and if you want to perform some operaons, you need to enter the user name and password to log in again.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Shutdown.

Shutdown Logout Shutdown Reboot Cancel

Figure 2-30 Logout

Step 2 Click Logout.

NOTE

Aer you have logged out of the system, menu operaon on the screen is invalid. It is required to input a user name and password to unlock the system.

2.6 Resetting Your Password

Purpose

When you forget the password of the admin, you can reset the password by imporg the GUID le. The GUID le must be exported and saved in the local USB ash drive aer you have acvated the device (refer to Chapter 2.2 Acvang the Device).

Step 1 On the user login interface, click Forget Password to enter the Import GUID interface.

Reset Password Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play 4.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:50:28 5.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:50:32 6.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:50:42 7.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:10 8.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:16 9.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-02-2016 11:52:24 GUID_583574624_20160... 128B File 09-06-2016 14:10:37 Free Space 14.26GB New Folder Import Back

Figure 2-31 Import GUID

Step 2 Select the GUID le from the USB ash drive and click Import buon to pop up the Reset Password interface.

Reset Password User Name admin Create New Pass... ***** Confirm New Pass... ***** ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Cancel

Figure 2-32 Reset Password

Step 3 Input the new password and conrm the password.

Step 4 Click OK to save the new password. Then the Aenon box pops up as shown below.

Attention The password is reset. The GUID file is ineffective. Export a new GUID file. OK

Figure 2-33 GUID File Imported

Step 5 Click OK and the Aenon box as below pops up to remind you to duplicate the password of the device to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Click Yes to duplicate the password or No to cancel it.

Attention Duplicate the password to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Yes No

Figure 2-34 Duplicate the Password

NOTE

• If you want to retrieve the password when you forget it, you must export the GUID le rst.
• Once the password is reset, the GUID le will be invalid. You can export a new GUID le. Refer to Chapter 17.5.3 Eding a User for reference.

2.7 Adding and Connecting the IP Cameras

2.7.1 Activating the IP Camera

Purpose

Before adding the camera, make sure the IP camera to be added is in acve status.

Step 1 Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu> Camera> IP Camera.

For the IP camera detected online in the same network segment, the Security status shows whether it is acve or inacve.

IP Camera Management Camer... Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Address Edit Upgrade Camera Na Active 10.16.2.109 Active 10.16.2.222 Inactive 10.16.1.205 Refresh One-touch Activ... Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding Enable H.265 (For Initial Access) Max. IP Camera Number: 8 Net Receive Idle Bandwidth: 126Mbps Exit

Figure 2-35 IP Camera Management Interface

Step 2 Click the inacve icon of the camera to enter the following interface to acvate it. You can also select mulple cameras from the list and click the One-touch Acvate to acvate the cameras in batch.

Activation ■ Use Admin Password Create New P... Confirm New P... ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Cancel

One-touch Activate Use Admin Password Create New P... Confirm New P... ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Cancel

Figure 2-36 Acvate the Camera

Step 3 Set the password of the camera to acvate it.

Use Admin Password: When you check the checkbox, the camera (s) will be congured with the same admin password of the operang DVR.

Create New Password: If the admin password is not used, you must create the new password for the camera and conrm it.

Activation ■ Use Admin Password Create New P... ********* Strong Confirm New P... ********* ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Cancel

Figure 2-37 Set New Password

WARNING

STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-We highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case leers, lower case leers, numbers, and special characters.) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly, especially in the high security system, reseng the password monthly or weekly can beer protect your product.

Step 4 Click OK to nish the acitavng of the IP camera. And the security status of camera will be changed to Acve.

2.7.2 Adding the Online IP Camera

Purpose

Before you can get a live view or record of the video, you should add the network cameras to the conncon list of the device.

Before you start

Ensure the network conncon is valid and correct. For detailed checking and conguring of the network, please see Chapter 12 Network Sengs.

- OPTION 1:

Step 1 Select Add IP Camera from the right-click menu in live view mode or go to Menu> Camera> IP Camera.

IP Camera Management Camer... Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Address Edit Upgrade Camera No Active 10.16.2.109 Active 10.16.2.222 Inactive 10.16.1.205 Refresh One-touch Activ... Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding Enable H.265 (For Initial Access) Max. IP Camera Number: 8 Net Receive Idle Bandwidth: 126Mbps Exit

Figure 2-38 IP Camera Management Interface

Step 2 The online cameras with same network segment will be detected and displayed in the camera list.

Step 3 Select the IP camera from the list and click to add the camera (with the same admin password of the DVR's). Or you can click the One-touch Adding button to add all cameras (with the same admin password) from the list.

i NOTE

Make sure the camera to add has already been acavted by seng the admin password, and the admin password of the camera is the same with the DVR's.

Step 4 (Oponal) Check the checkbox of Enable H.265 (For Inial Access) for the connected IP camera supporting H.265. Then the IP camera will be encoded with H.265.

Step 5 (For the encoders with mulple channels only) check the checkbox of Channel Port in the pop-up window, as shown in the following gure, and click OK to add mulple channels.

Channel Port ✓ Channel Port ✓ 1 ✓ 2 ✓ 3 ✓ 4 ✓ 5 OK Cancel

Figure 2-39 Select Mulple Channels

- OPTION 2:

Step 1 On the IP Camera Management interface, click the Custom Adding buon to pop up the Add IP Camera (Custom) interface.

Add IP Camera (Custom) No. IP Address Amount of C... Device Model Protocol Manager 1 10.16.2.109 1 DS-2CD5126...HIKVISION 8000 2 10.16.2.222 1 DS-2CD2312-I HIKVISION 8000 IP Camera Address 10.16.2.109 Protocol CNMF Management Port 80 Transfer Protocol Auto User Name hemin Admin Password Continue to Add Search Add Back

Figure 2-40 Custom Adding IP Camera Interface

Step 2 You can edit the IP address, protocol, management port, and other informaon of the IP camera to be added.

i NOTE

If the IP camera to add has not been acavated, you can acvate it from the IP camera list on the IP Camera Management interface.

Step 3 Click Add to add the camera.

For the successfully added IP cameras, the Security status shows the security level of the password of camera: strong password, weak password and risky password.

IP Camera Management Camera... Add/Delete Status Security IP Camera Addr... Edit Upgr... Camera Name ID1 Strong Password 10.15.2.250 PCamera 02 Active 10.15.1.10 Active 10.16.5.3 Refresh One-touch Activ... Upgrade Delete One-touch Adding Custom Adding Enable H 265 (For Initial Access) Max. IP Camera Number: 8 Net Receive Idle Bandwidth: 126Mbps Exit

Figure 2-41 Successfully Added IP Cameras

Please refer to Chapter 18.1 Specicaons for the number of connectable IP cameras for dierent models.

Table 2-1 Explanaon of the Icons

Icon	Explanation	Icon	Explanation
[62C0]	Edit basic parameters of the camera	[AZZ3]	Add the detected IP camera.
	The camera is disconnected; You can click the icon to get the excepon informaon of camera.	[G37X]	Delete the IP camera
	Play the live video of the connected camera.		Advanced sengs of the camera.
	Upgrade the connected IP camera.	[DS24]	Shows the security status of the camera to be acve/inacve or the password strength (strong/medium/weak/risky)

Step 4 (Oponal) Check the checkbox of Enable H.265 (For Inial Access) for the connected IP camera supporting H.265. Then the IP camera will be encoded with H.265.

2.7.3 Editing the Connected IP Camera

Purpose

Aer the adding of the IP cameras, the basic informaon of the camera is listed on the interface, and you can congure the basic sengs of the IP cameras.

Step 1 Click the 📋 icon to edit the parameters. You can edit the IP address, protocol and other parameters.

Edit IP Camera IP Camera No. D1 IP Camera Address 10.16.1.250 Protocol ONMF Management Port 80 Channel Port 1 Transfer Protocol Auto User Name adults Admin Password OK Cancel

Figure 2-42 Edit IP Camera

Channel Port: If the connected device is an encoding device with mulple channels, you can choose the channel to connect by selecng the channel port No. in the drop-down list.

Step 2 Click OK to save the sengs and exit from the editing interface.

Step 3 Drag the horizontal scroll bar to the right side and click the 📋 icon to edit the advanced parameters.

Advanced Settings Network Password IP Camera No. D1 IP Camera Address 10.16.1.250 Management Port 8000 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 2-43 Network Conguraon of the Camera

Step 4 You can edit the network informaon and the password of the camera.

Advanced Settings Network Password IP Camera No. D1 Current Password New Password Confirm ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. Apply OK Cancel

Figure 2-44 Password Conguraon of the Camera

Step 5 Click OK to save the sengs and exit the interface.

2.8 Connecting PoC Cameras

Purpose

-K/P series DVR support PoC (Power over Coaxitron) cameras conncon. DVR will detect the connected PoC cameras automacally, manage the power consumpon via the coaxial communicaon, and provide power to the cameras via coaxitron.

Before you start

Connect the PoC camera to the DVR.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > PoC Informaon.

IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export PoC Information 1-8 0 PoC. af camera(s) and 1 PoC. at camera(s) has been connected, 8 PoC. af camera(s) or 4 PoC. at camera(s) can be added.

Figure 2-45 PoC Informaon

Step 2 Check the status of connected PoC camera.

• If the power consumption of the DVR is lower than that of AF camera, when AF or AT camera is connected, there is no video and "Insufficient Power for PoC" is overlaid on the live view image.
• If the power consumption of the DVR is higher than that of the AF camera and lower than that of the AT camera, when AF camera is connected, it is powered on normally; when AT camera is connected, it is powered on and then powered o, and there is no video and “Insucient Power for PoC” is overlaid on the live view image.
• If the power consumption of the DVR is higher than that of the AT camera, when AF or AT camera is connected, it is powered on normally.

09-28-2017 Wed 22:51:69 Insufficient Power For PoC NO VIDEO Camera 13

Figure 2-46 Note on Live View Image

Step 3 Check the connected AF or AT camera number and the connectable camera number.

i NOTE

● Only Hikvision PoC camera is supported.
● The maximum connectable AT/AF camera number varies with dierent models.
- Do not unplug or plug the PoC camera if it is powered by the external power supply.

2.9 Configuring Signal Input Channel

NOTE

This chapter is only applicable to DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR.

Purpose

You can congregate the analog and IP signal input types and enable 5 MP long distance transmission.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export Camera HD/CVBS IP A1 A2 A3 A4 Max. IP Camera Number 4 5MP Long Distance Transmission

Figure 2-47 Signal Input Status

Step 2 Check the checkbox to select dierent signal input types: HD/CVBS and IP. If you select HD/CVBS, four types of analog signal inputs including Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, and CVBS can be connected randomly for the selected channel. If you select IP, IP camera can be connected for the selected channel.

Step 3 Click Apply to save the sengs.

i NOTE

You can view the max. accessible number of IP cameras in the Max. IP Camera Number text eld. For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR, disabling one analog channel will add one IP channel. For DS-7300HUHI-K series DVR, the accessible IP channels are X+2 (X refers to the disabled analog channel(s) of the DVR.). For DS-9008HUHI-K8 series, the accessible IP channels are X+10 (X refers to the disabled analog channel(s) of the DVR.). For DS-9016HUHI-K8 series, the accessible IP channels are X+18 (X refers to the disabled analog channel(s) of the DVR.) and the max. IP channels are 32.

2.10 Configuring 5 MP Long Distance Transmission

i NOTE

This chapter is only applicable to HUHI and HTHI series DVR.

Purpose

For HUHI and HTHI series DVR, you can congregate 5 MP long distance transmission on the Signal Input Status interface.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status.

Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export SMP Long Distance Transmission

Figure 2-48 Signal Input Status (for DS-7200HUHI/HTHI Series)

Signal Input Status IP Camera IP Camera Import/Export Camera HD/CVBS IP A1 ✓ A2 ✓ A3 ✓ ■ A4 ✓ ■ Max. IP Camera Number 4 5MP Long Distance Transmission

Figure 2-49 Signal Input Status (for DS-7300/9000HUHI Series)

Step 2 Click 📁 enter the 5 MP Long Distance Transmission Sengs interface.

Settings Trigger Channel Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 2-50 5 MP Long Distance Transmission Sengs

Step 3 Check the checkbox to enable 5 MP Long Distance Transmission of the selected channel. Step 4 Click Apply to save the sengs.

Chapter 3 Live View

3.1 Introduction of Live View

Live view shows you the video image geng from each camera in real me. The DVR will automatically enter Live View mode when powered on. It is also at the very top of the menu hierarchy, thus hing the ESC many mes (depending on which menu you're on) will bring you to the Live View mode.

Live View Icons

In the live view mode, there are icons at the right top of the screen for each channel, showing the status of the record and alarm in the channel, so that you can know whether the channel is recorded, or whether there are alarms occur as soon as possible.

Table 3-1 Descripon of Live View Icons

Icons	Description
[CTW4]	Alarm (video loss, tampering, moon detecon, VCA or sensor alarm)
	Record (manual record, schedule record, moon detecon or alarm triggered record)
	Alarm & Record
[6EZW]	Event/Excepon (moon detecon, sensor alarm or excepon informaon. For details, see Chapter 8.7 Handling Excepons.)

3.2 Operations in Live View Mode

In live view mode, there are many funcons provided. The funcons are listed below.

● Single Screen: show only one screen on the monitor.
- Mul-screen: show mulple screens on the monitor simultaneously.
- Start Auto-switch: the screen is auto switched to the next one. And you must set the dwell me for each screen on the conguraon menu before enabling the auto-switch. Menu>Conguraon>Live View>Dwell Time.
- Start Recording: normal record and moon detecon record are supported.
- Output Mode: select the output mode to Standard, Bright, Gentle or Vivid.

• Playback: play back the recorded videos for current day.
• Aux/Main Monitor: the DVR checks the conneccon of the output interfaces to denote the main and auxiliary output interfaces. When the aux output is enabled, the main output cannot do any operaon, and you can do some basic operaon on the live view mode for the Aux output.

For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series, there are two HDMI interfaces. HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. The priority level for the main and aux output is HDMI2> VGA/HDMI1. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output. The priority relationship is shown as Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Priories of Outputs for DS-7300/9000HUHI-K Series

S.N	HDMI2	VGA/HDMI1	CVBS	Main output	Auxiliary output	For Live View Output Only
1	√	√	√ or ×	HDMI2	VGA/HDMI1	CVBS
2	√ or ×	×	√ or ×	HDMI2	CVBS	VGA/HDMI1
3	×	√	√ or ×	VGA/HDMI1	CVBS	HDMI2

HTHI series DVR support independent VGA and HDMI output, and simultaneous VGA/HDMI output. In the independent output mode, the priority level for the main and aux output is HDMI > VGA. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output. The priority relationship is shown as Table 3-3. In the simultaneous output mode, the VGA/HDMI output is the main output, and the CVBS output is the aux output. The priority relationship is shown as Table 3-4.

Table 3-3 Priories of Outputs for HTHI Series in Independent Output Mode

S.N	HDMI	VGA	CVBS	Main output	Auxiliary output	For Live View Output Only
1	√	√	√ or ×	HDMI	VGA	CVBS
2	√ or ×	×	√ or ×	HDMI	CVBS	VGA
3	×	√	√ or ×	VGA	CVBS	HDMI

For other DVR with CVBS output, the VGA/HDMI output is the main output, and the CVBS output is the aux output. The priority relationship is shown as Table 3-4.

Table 3-4 Priorities of Outputs

S.N	HDMI	VGA	CVBS	Main output	Auxiliary output
1	or ×	or ×	or ×	VGA/HDMI	CVBS

NOTE

v means the interface is in use, × means the interface is out of use or the conncon is invalid. And the HDMI, VGA and CVBS can be used at the same me.

3.2.1 Using the Mouse in Live View

You can refer to Table 3-4 for the descripon of mouse operaon in live view mode.

Table 3-5 Mouse Operaon in Live View

Name	Description
Menu	Enter the main menu of the system by right clicking the mouse.
Single Screen	Switch to the single full screen by choosing channel number from the drop-down list.
Multi-Screen	Adjust the screen layout by selecng from the drop-down list.
Previous Screen	Switch to the previous screen.
Next Screen	Switch to the next screen.
Start/Stop Auto-Switch	Enable/disable the auto-switch of the screens.NOTEThe dwell me of the live view conguraon must be set before using Start Auto-Switch.
Start Recording	Start recording of all channels, Connuous Record and Moon Detecon Record are selectable from the drop-down list.
Add IP Camera	A shortcut to enter the IP camera management interface.(For HDVR series only)
Playback	Enter the playback interface and start playing back the video of the selected channel immediately.
PTZ Control	A shortcut to enter the PTZ control interface of the selected camera.
Output Mode	Output Mode is congorable with Standard, Bright, Gentle and Vivid opons.
Aux Monitor	Switch to the auxiliary output mode and the operaon for the main output is disabled.NOTEIf you enter Aux monitor mode and the Aux monitor is not connected, the mouse operaon is disabled. You need to switch back to the Main output with the F1 buon on front panel or VOIP/MONbuon on IR remote control and then press the Enter buon.

Common Menu Menu Single Screen Multi-screen Previous Screen Next Screen Start Auto-switch Start Recording Add IP Camera Playback PTZ Control Output Mode Aux Monitor

Figure 3-1 Right-click Menu

3.2.2 Switching Main/Aux Output

NOTE

• Refer to Chapter 3.2 Operaons in Live View Mode for the main and aux output relationship.
  ● The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output.

Step 1 Use the mouse wheel to double-click on the HDMI1/VGA, or HDMI2, or HDMI/VGA output screen, and the following message box pops up.

Tip Double-click the mouse again to switch the auxiliary and main output? Cancel

Figure 3-2 Switch Main and Aux Output

Step 2 Use the mouse wheel to double-click on the screen again to switch to the aux output, or click Cancel to cancel the operaon.

Step 3 Select the Menu Output Mode to others from the right-click menu on the monitor.

Step 4 On the pop-up message box, click Yes to reboot the device to enable the selected menu output as the main output.

NOTE

You can select the Menu Output Mode under Menu > Conguraon > General > More Settings to Auto, HDMI1/VGA and HDMI2 (for DS-7300/9000HUHI-K) or Auto and HDMI/VGA (for other models) and then reboot the device to switch the main output.

3.2.3 Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mode

On the screen of each channel, there is a quick seng toolbar which shows when you click the screen.

Screenshot of a software toolbar with icons for media, video, and image processing functions

Figure 3-3 Quick Seng Toolbar

You can refer to Table 3-5 for the descripon of Quick Seng Toolbar icons.

Table 3-6 Descripon of Quick Seng Toolbar Icons

Icons	Description	Icons		Description	Icons	Description
	Enable/Disable Manual Record			Instant Playback		Mute/Audio on
	PTZ Control			Digital Zoom		Image Sengs
	Close Live View			Face Detecon		Informaon
	Show/Hide VCA Informaon			Capture

NOTE

● Showing/Hiding VCA informaon is only applicable to HUHI and HTHI series DVR.
● Picture capture is only applicable to DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR.

Instant Playback only shows the record in last ve minutes. If no record is found, it means ere is no record during the last ve minutes.

Digital Zoom is for zooming in the live image. You can zoom in the image to dierent proporons (1 to 16X) by moving the sliding bar. You can also scroll the mouse wheel to control the zoom in/out.

Highway traffic scene with multiple vehicles and a red double-decker bus, no visible text or signage

Figure 3-4 Digital Zoom

Image Sengs icon can be selected to enter the Image Sengs menu. You can drag the mouse or click 📋 to adjust the image parameters, including brightness, contrast, and saturaon. Refer to the Chapter 15.3 Conguring Video Parameters for details.

Image Settings Time Segment - 00:00-24:00 Mode Custom 146 255 255 OK

Figure 3-5 Image Sengs

Face Detecon can be enabled if you click the icon. The dialog pops up as shown in Figure 3-6.

Click Yes and the full-screen live view of the channel is enabled. You can click ✗ to exit from the full-screen mode.

Attention Enable face detection? Yes No

Figure 3-6 Enable Face Detecon

NOTE

You can congregate face detection only when it is supported by the connected camera.

Move the mouse onto the Informaon icon to show the real-me stream informaon, using the frame rate, bit rate, resoluon and stream type.

Figure 3-7 Informaon

NOTE

When H.264 IP camera is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264. When IP camera supportng H.264+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.264+. When IP camera supportng H.265 is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265. When IP camera supportng H.265+ is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265+.

For analog cameras supporting VCA, click the icon to show the VCA informaon. Then the cured line or quadrilateral in the VCA conguraon and target frame(s) will be shown on the view. Click the icon again to hide the VCA informaon.

12-13-2016 Tue 10:29:36 Camera 01

Figure 3-8 Enable VCA Informaon Overlay

NOTE

• In the live view, only the analog cameras support VCA informaon overlay.
• Enable VCA funcon rst before showing the VCA informaon. Refer to Chapter 10 VCA Alarm for the detailed operaon.
• The VCA informaon is hidden by default. If the connected analog camera does not support VCA, the icon displays grey and cannot be operated.
• For the analog cameras, the VCA informaon includes line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon.
  ● The DVR only supports VCA informaon overlay of one channel. If you enable the funcon of one channel, the other channels will disable the funcon automacally.
  ● Both single window and mul-window display modes support VCA informaon overlay.
• Only the main output supports VCA informaon overlay. When switching to the aux output, the VCA informaon overlay of main output is disabled.

- For the analog cameras, if the camera number does not exceed the limit for line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, the VCA informaon overlay can be enabled for all the analog cameras enabled line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon. If the camera number exceeds the limit for line crossing detecon, intrusion detecon and sudden scene change detecon, only the cameras enabled line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon support VCA informaon overlay. Disabling line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon remotely will not act the VCA informaon overlay in the local live view.

3.3 Channel-Zero Encoding

Purpose

Sometimes you need to get a remote view of many channels in real me from web browser or CMS (Client Management System) soware, in order to decrease the bandwidth requirement without aecng the image quality, channel-zero encoding is supported as an opon for you.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Live View > Channel-Zero Encoding.

Enable Channel-Zero Enc...	✓
Frame Rate	12fps
Max. Bitrate Mode	General
Max. Bitrate(Kbps)	1024

Figure 3-9 Live View- Channel-Zero Encoding

Step 2 Check the checkbox aer Enable Channel-Zero Encoding.

Step 3 Congure the Frame Rate, Max. Bitrate Mode and Max. Bitrate.

Step 4 Click the Apply buon to acvate the setngs.

Step 5 Aer you set the Channel-Zero encoding, you can get a view in the remote client or web browser of 16 channels in one screen.

3.4 Adjusting Live View Settings

Purpose

Live View sengs can be customized according to dierent needs. You can conjure the output interface, dwell me for screen to be shown, mute or turning on the audio, the screen number for each channel, etc.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Live View > General.

Video Output Interface VGAHOM1 Live View Mode 4 * 4 Dwell Time No Switch Enable Audio Output Volume Event Output VGAHOM1 Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time 10s

Figure 3-10 Live View-General

The sengs available in this menu include:

● Video Output Interface: Selects the output to congregate the sengs.

For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR, you can select VGA/HDMI1, HDMI2, Main CVBS for video output interface.

For HTHI series DVR, if you have enabled VGA/HDMI simultaneous output under Menu > Conguraon > General > More Settings, you can select VGA/HDMI and Main CVBS for video output interface. If you have enabled independent VGA and HDMI output, you can select VGA, HDMI, and Main CVBS for video output interface.

For other models, you can select Main CVBS and HDMI/VGA for video output interface.

● Live View Mode: Selects the display mode to be used for Live View.

NOTE

- For HUHI and HTHI series DVR, if you set the video output resoluon as 1024*768 in Menu > Conguraon > General, when you set more than 16 windows, the following message box will pop up as below. If you set the video output resoluon as 1280*720 or 1280*1024 in Menu > Conguraon > General, when you set more than 25 windows, the following message box will pop up as below.

Attention The current output resolution is too low, so the live view of HD signal may be influenced in multi-window division modes. You are recommended to switch to higher output resolution. OK

Figure 3-11 Note for Live View Mode

- If you have set the video output resoluon larger than 1280*1024, and then switch to low resoluon, the former live view mode will not be changed.

- Dwell Time: The me in seconds to dwell between switching of channels when enabling auto-switch in Live View.

- Enable Audio Output: Enables/disables audio output for the selected camera in the live view mode.

● Volume: Adjusts the volume of the audio output.
- Event Output: Designates the output to show event video. If available, you can select a dierent video output interface from the Video Output Interface when an event occurs.
● Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time: Sets the me in seconds to show alarm event screen.

Step 2 Set the camera order.

1) Click View tab and select the Video Output Interface from the drop-down list.

General View Channel-Zero Encoding Video Output Interface VGA/HDMI Camera... Camera Name A1 Camera 01 A2 Camera 02 A3 Camera 03 A4 Camera 04 A5 Camera 05 A6 Camera 06 A7 Camera 07 A8 Camera 08 A9 Camera 09 A10 Camera 10 A11 Camera 11 1 D1 A1 A3 A4 5 A8 A6 A7 B 9 A9 A10 A11 A12 13 A13 A14 A15 A16 P: 1/2 Apply Back

Figure 3-12 Live View-Camera Order

2) Select a window, and then double-click a camera name in the camera list you would like to display. Seng an 'X' means the window will not display any camera.

3) You can also click 📄 to start live view of all channels in order and click 📄 to stop live view of all channels. Click 📄 to go to the previous or next page.

4) Click the Apply buon.

i NOTE

For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR, if the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output.

3.5 Manual Video Quality Diagnostics

Purpose

The video quality of the analog channels can be diagnosed manually and you can view the diagnostic results from a list.

Step 1 Go to Menu> Manual >Manual Video Quality Diagnoscs.

Manual Video Quality Diagnostics ✓ Analog ✓ A1 ✓ A2 ✓ A3 ✓ A4 ✓ A5 ✓ A6 ✓ A7 ✓ A8 ✓ A9 ✓ A10 ✓ A11 ✓ A12 ✓ A13 ✓ A14 ✓ A15 ✓ A16

Figure 3-13 Video Quality Diagnoscs

Step 2 Check the checkboxes to select the channels for diagnoses.

Step 3 Click the buon Diagnose, and the results will be displayed on a list. You can view the video status and diagnoses me of the selected channels.

Manual Video Quality Diagnostics ✓ Analog ✓ A1 ✓ A2 ✓ A3 ✓ A4 ✓ A5 ✓ A6 ✓ A7 ✓ A8 ✓ A9 ✓ A10 ✓ A11 ✓ A12 ✓ A13 ✓ A14 ✓ A15 ✓ A16 Diagnostics Result Camera No. Diagnostics Result Diagnostics Time A1 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:17 A2 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A9 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A3 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A10 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A4 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A5 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A11 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:18 A6 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A12 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A7 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A8 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A13 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 A14 Normal 25-04-2014 14:54:19 Diagnose Back

Figure 3-14 Diagnoscs Result

NOTE

• Connect the camera to the device for the video quality diagnoses.
• Three excepon types can be diagnosed: Blurred Image, Abnormal Brightness and Color Cast.

Chapter 4 PTZ Controls

4.1 Configuring PTZ Settings

Purpose

Follow the procedure to set the parameters for PTZ. The conguring of the PTZ parameters should be done before you control the PTZ camera.

Step 1 Go to Menu >Camera> PTZ.

PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Patrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter... Enable Omnicest Control Zoom Focus Iris Speed PTZ Back

Figure 4-1 PTZ Sengs

Step 2 Select the camera for PTZ seng in the Camera drop-down list.

Step 3 Click the PTZ Parameters buon to set the PTZ parameters.

PTZ Parameter Settings Saud Rate 9600 Data Bit 0 Stop Bit 1 Parity None Flow Ctrl None PTZ Protocol UTC(Coexifron) Address 0 Address range: 0~255 Copy OK Cancel

Figure 4-2 PTZ-General

Step 4 Select the parameters of the PTZ camera from the drop-down list.

NOTE

● All the parameters should be exactly the same as the PTZ camera parameters.
- For the Coaxitron camera/dome connected, you can select the PTZ protocol to UTC (Coaxitron). Make sure the protocol selected here is supported by the connected camera/dome.
- When the Coaxitron protocol is selected, all the other parameters like the baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity and ow control are not congorable.
- When Hikvision CVBS camera is connected, you can control PTZ via Coaxitron.

Step 5 (Oponal) Click Copy buon to copy the sengs to the other channels. Select the channels you want to copy to and click OK to return to the PTZ Parameters Sengs interface.

Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 OK Cancel

Figure 4-3 Copy to Other Channels

Step 6 Click OK to save the setngs.

Step 7 (Oponal) Check the checkbox of Enable Omnicast Control to enable the PTZ control of the selected camera via Omnicast VMS of Genetec.

4.2 Setting PTZ Presets, Patrols and Patterns

Before you start

Please make sure that the presets, patrols and patterns should be supported by PTZ protocols.

4.2.1 Customizing Presets

Purpose

Follow the steps to set the Preset locaon which you want the PTZ camera to point to when an event takes place.

Step 1 Go to Menu>Camera>PTZ.

PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call patrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter ... Enable Omnicest Control Zoom - Focus - Iris - Speed - PTZ Back

Figure 4-4 PTZ Sengs

Step 2 Use the direconal buon to wheel the camera to the locaon where you want to set preset; and the zoom and focus operaons can be recorded in the preset as well.

Step 3 Enter the preset No. (1\~255) in the preset text eld, and click the Set buon to link the locaon to the preset.

Repeat the steps from 2 to 3 to save more presets.

You can click the Clear button to clear the locaon informaon of the preset, or click the Clear All buon to clear the locaon informaon of all the presets.

4.2.2 Calling Presets

Purpose

This feature enables the camera to point to a specied posion such as a window when an event takes place.

Step 1 Click the buon PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ seng interface;

Or press the PTZ buon on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon in the quick seng bar, or select the PTZ opon in the right-click menu to show the PTZ control panel.

Step 2 Choose Camera in the drop-down list.

Step 3 Click the General tab to show the general seings of the PTZ control.

PTZ Camera [D1] IPdome Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Call Preset Call Patrol Stop Pa... 1 Call Patt... Stop Pa... 1

Figure 4-5 PTZ Panel-General

Step 4 Click to enter the preset No. in the corresponding text eld.

Step 5 Click the Call Preset buon to call it.

NOTE

When the Coaxitron camera/dome connected and the PTZ protocol is selected to UTC (Coaxitron), you can call the preset 95 to enter the menu of the connected Coaxitron camera/dome. Use the direconal buons on the PTZ control panel to operate the menu.

4.2.3 Customizing Patrols

Purpose

Patrols can be set to move the PTZ to dierent key points and have it stay there for a set duraon before moving on to the next key point. The key points are corresponding to the presets. The presets can be set following the steps above in Customizing Presets.

Step 1 Go to Menu>Camera>PTZ.

PTZ Camera [A1] Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Patrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter ... Enable Omnicat Control Zoom Focus Iris Speed PTZ Back

Figure 4-6 PTZ Sengs

Step 2 Select patrol No. in the drop-down list of patrol.

Step 3 Click the Set buon to add key points for the patrol.

KeyPoint KeyPoint: 1 Preset 1 Duration 0 S Speed 1 S Add OK Cancel

Figure 4-7 Key point Conguraon

Step 4 Congure key point parameters, such as the key point No., duraon of staying for one key point and speed of patrol. The key point is corresponding to the preset. The Key Point No. determines the order at which the PTZ will follow while cycling through the patrol. The Duraon refers to the me span to stay at the corresponding key point. The Speed denes the speed at which the PTZ will move from one key point to the next.

Step 5 Click the Add buon to add the next key point to the patrol, or you can click the OK buon to save the key point to the patrol.

You can delete all the key points by clicking the Clear buon for the selected patrol, or click the Clear All buon to delete all the key pints for all patrols.

4.2.4 Calling Patrols

Purpose

Calling a patrol makes the PTZ to move according the predened patrol path.

Step 1 Click the buon PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Sengs interface;

Or press the PTZ buon on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon in the quick seng bar, or select the PTZ opon in the right-click menu to show the PTZ control panel.

Step 2 Click the General tab to show the general seings of the PTZ control.

PTZ Camera [D1] IPdome Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Call Preset Call Patrol Stop Pa... 1 Call Patt... Stop Pa... 1

Figure 4-8 PTZ Panel - General

Step 3 Select a patrol in the drop-down list and click the Call Patrol button to call it.

Step 4 You can click the Stop Patrol button to stop calling it.

4.2.5 Customizing Patterns

Purpose

Paerns can be set by recording the movement of the PTZ. You can call the paern to make the PTZ movement according to the predened path.

Step 1 Go to Menu>Camera>PTZ.

PTZ Camera (A1) Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Patrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter... Enable Cinnicest Control Zoom Focus Ins Speed PTZ Back

Figure 4-9 PTZ Sengs

Step 2 Choose paern number in the drop-down list.

Step 3 Click the Start buon and click corresponding buons in the control panel to move the PTZ camera, and click the Stop buon to stop it.

The movement of the PTZ is recorded as the paern.

4.2.6 Calling Patterns

Purpose

Follow the procedure to move the PTZ camera according to the predened paerns.

Step 1 Click the buon PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Sengs interface;

Or press the PTZ buon on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon in the quick seng bar, or select the PTZ opon in the right-click menu to show the PTZ control panel.

Step 2 Click the General tab to show the general seings of the PTZ control.

PTZ Camera [D1] IPdome Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Call Preset Call Patrol Stop Pa... 1 Call Patt... Stop Pa... 1

Figure 4-10 PTZ Panel - General

Step 3 Click the Call Pattern buon to call it.

Step 4 Click the Stop Pattern button to stop calling it.

4.2.7 Customizing Linear Scan Limit

Purpose

The Linear Scan can be enabled to trigger the scan in the horizontal direcon in the predened range.

NOTE

This funcon is supported by some certain models.

Step 1 Go to Menu>Camera>PTZ.

PTZ Camera |A1| Camera 01 Preset Set Clear Clear All Call Patrol 1 Set Clear Clear All Call Pattern 1 Start Stop Clear All Linear Scan Left Limit Right Limit PTZ Parameter ... Enable Omnicat Control Zoom Focus Iris Speed PTZ Back

Figure 4-11 PTZ Sengs

Step 2 Use the direconal buon to wheel the camera to the locaon where you want to set the limit, and click the Le Limit or Right Limit button to link the locaon to the corresponding limit.

NOTE

The speed dome starts linear scan from the le limit to the right limit, and you must set the le limit on the le side of the right limit, as well the angle from the le limit to the right limit should be no more than 180^ .

4.2.8 Calling Linear Scan

Purpose

Follow the procedure to call the linear scan in the predened scan range.

Step 1 Click the buon PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Sengs interface;

Or press the PTZ buon on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon in the quick seng bar to enter the PTZ seng menu in live view mode.

Step 2 Click the One-touch tab to show the one-touch funcon of the PTZ control.

PTZ Camera [D1] IPdome Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Park(Quick Patrol) Park(Patrol 1) Park(Preset 1) Linear Scan Restore

Figure 4-12 PTZ Panel - One-touch

Step 3 Click Linear Scan buon to start the linear scan and click the Linear Scan buon again to stop it.

You can click the Restore button to clear the dened le limit and right limit data and the dome needs to reboot to make sengs take eect.

4.2.9 One-Touch Park

Purpose

For some certain model of the speed dome, it can be congured to start a predened park acon (scan, preset, patrol and etc.) automacally aer a period of inacvity (park me).

Step 1 Click the buon PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Sengs interface;

Or press the PTZ buon on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon in the quick seng bar to enter the PTZ seng menu in live view mode.

Step 2 Click the One-touch tab to show the one-touch funcon of the PTZ control.

PTZ Camera [D1] IPdome Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Park(Quick Patrol) Park(Patrol 1) Park(Preset 1) Linear Scan Restore

Figure 4-13 PTZ Panel - One-touch

Step 3 There are 3 one-touch park types selectable. Click the corresponding button to acvate the park acon.

Park (Quick Patrol): The dome starts patrol from the predened preset 1 to preset 32 in order aer the park me. The undened preset will be skipped.

Park (Patrol 1): The dome starts moving according to the predened patrol 1 path aer the park me.

Park (Preset 1): The dome moves to the predened preset 1 locaon aer the park me.

NOTE

The park me can only be set through the speed dome conguraon interface. The default value is 5s.

Step 4 Click the buon again to inacvate it.

4.3 PTZ Control Panel

To enter the PTZ control panel, there are two ways supported.

OPTION 1:

In the PTZ Seings interface, click the PTZ buon on the lower-right corner which is next to the Back buon.

OPTION 2:

In the Live View mode, you can press the PTZ Control buon on the front panel or on the remote control, or choose the PTZ Control icon in the quick seng bar, or select the PTZ Control opon in the right-click menu.

Click the Conguraon buon on the control panel, and you can enter the PTZ Setngs interface.

NOTE

In PTZ control mode, the PTZ panel will be displayed when a mouse is connected with the device. If no mouse is connected, the PTZ on appears in the lower-le corner of the window, indicating that this camera is in PTZ control mode.

PTZ Camera [D1] IPcome Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Zoom - Focus - Iris - Speed

PTZ Camera [D1] IPdome Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Call Preset Call Patrol Stop Pa... 1 Call Patt... Stop Pa... 1

PTZ Camera [D1] IPdome Configuration PTZ Co... One-tou... General Park(Quick Patrol) Park(Patrol 1) Park(Preset 1) Linear Scan Restore

Figure 4-14 PTZ Control Panel

You can refer to Table 4-1 for the descripon of the PTZ panel icons.

Table 4-1 Descripon of the PTZ panel icons

Icon	Description	Icon	Description	Icon	Description
	Direconbuon and theauto-cyclebuon		Zoom+, Focus+,Iris+		Zoom-, Focus-,Iris-
	The speed ofthe PTZmovement		Light on/o		Wiper on/o
[0433]	3D-Zoom		ImageCentralizaon		Menu
	Switch to thePTZ controlinterface	One-touch	Switch to theone-touchcontrolinterface	General	Switch to thegeneral sengsinterface
[8408]	Exit		Minimizewindows

NOTE

When Hikvision CVBS camera is connected, you can click to call the OSD of the camera.

Chapter 5 Recording and Capture Settings

NOTE

The picture capture is supported by the DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR only.

5.1 Configuring Encoding Parameters

Before you start

Step 1 Make sure that the HDD has already been installed. If not, please install a HDD and initialize it. (Menu>HDD>General)

Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gro... Edit Delete 1 2794.52GB Normal R/W Local 2613.00GB 1 - -

Figure 5-1 HDD- General

Step 2 Click Advanced tab to check the storage mode of the HDD. (Menu>HDD>Advanced>Storage Mode)

1) If the HDD mode is Quota, please set the maximum record capacity. For detailed informaon, see Chapter 14.4 Conguring Quota Mode.
2) If the HDD mode is Group, you should set the HDD group. For detailed informaon, see Chapter 5.9 Conguring HDD Group.

Storage Mode Mode Group Record on HDD Group 1 Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 Enable HDD Sleeping

Figure 5-2 HDD- Advanced

Steps

Step 1 Go to Menu>Record>Parameters.

Camera [A1] Camera 01 Camera Resolution NO VIDEO Encoding Parameters Main Stream(Continuous) Main Stream(Event) Stream Type Video & Audio - Video & Audio Resolution 1920°1080(1080P) - 1920°1080(1080P) Bitrate Type Constant - Constant Video Quality Medium - Medium Frame Rate 15fps - 15fps Max. Bitrate Mode General - General Max. Bitrate(Kbps) 1536 - 1536 Max. Bitrate Range Recommend... 2304~3840(Kbps) 2304~3840(Kbps) Max. Average Bitrate(Kbps) 1142 1142 Video Encoding H.265 - H.265 Enable H.265+ More Settings...

Figure 5-3 Record Parameters

Step 2 Set the parameters for recording.

1) Select the Record tab to congure.
2) Select a camera from the camera drop-down list.
3) View the Camera Resoluon.

i NOTE

When Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, you can view the informaon including the input signal type, resolution and frame rate (e.g., 1080P30). When CVBS input is connected, you can view the informaon such as NTSC or PAL.

4) Congure the following parameters for the Main Stream (Connuous) and the Main Stream (Event).

Stream Type: Set the stream type to be Video or Video & Audio.

Resoluon: Set recording resoluon.

i NOTE

● HTHI, 7208/7216HUHI, 7300HUHI, and 9000HUHI series DVR support up to 8 MP resolution of all the channels.
HQHI series DVR support up to 4 MP lite resolution of all the channels.
- The 3 MP signal input is available for channel 1 of HQHI series DVR with 4 video inputs, for channel 1/2 of HQHI series DVR with 8 video inputs, and for channel 1/2/3/4 of HQHI series DVR with 16 video inputs.
- The analog signal inputs (Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, CVBS) and IP signal input can be recognized and connected automatically.
- If the congured encoding resoluon conicts with the resoluon of the front-end camera, the encoding parameters will adjust automacally to meet the front-end camera. E.g., if the

resoluon of the front-end camera is 720p, then the encoding resoluon of the main stream will adjust to 720p automacally.

• The resolution of 960 × 1080 (1080P Lite) is available when the 1080P Lite is enabled in the Record>Advanced Sengs interface (refer to Chapter 5.12 Conguring 1080P Lite).
• Please refer to the Appendix-Specicaons for the supported resoluons of dierent models.

Bitrate Type: Set the bitrate type to be Variable or Constant.

Video Quality: Set the video quality of recording, with 6 levels congorable.

NOTE

The Stream Type, Resoluon, Bitrate Type and Video Quality are not congorable for the Main Stream (Event) of the IP Camera.

Frame Rate: Set the frame rate of recording.

NOTE

• For HTHI series DVR, when 8 MP signal input is connected, the fram rate of the main stream cannot exceed 12 fps.
• For HQHI series DVR, when 4 MP lite signal input is connected, the frame rate of the main stream cannot exceed 15 fps.
• For HUHI series DVR, when 8 MP signal input is connected, the frame rate of the main stream cannot exceed 8 fps. When 5 MP signal input is connected, the frame rate of the main stream cannot exceed 12 fps.
  ● The minimum frame rate for main stream is 1 fps.
• If you set dierent frame rates for the connuous and event recording, when you click Apply to save the sengs, the note pops up as below.

Attention Different frame rate in continuous and event recording may cause problems in the exported AVI video. Continue? Yes No

Figure 5-4 Note for Dierent Frame Rates

Max. Bitrate Mode: Set the mode to General or Custom.

Max Bitrate (Kbps): Select or customize the maximum bit rate for recording.

Max. Bitrate Range Recommended: A recommended max. bit rate range is provided for reference.

Max. Average Bitrate (Kbps): Set the max. average bit rate which refers to the average amount of data transferred per unit of me.

Video Encoding:

You can congregate H.264 or H.265 for the main stream (connuous) of IP and analog cameras.

NOTE

When the connected IP camera does not support H.265, only H.264 can be selected for the main stream (connuous).

Step 3 Check the checkbox of Enable H.264+ or Enable H.265+ to enable this funcon. Enabling it helps to ensure the high video quality with a lowered bitrate.

NOTE

• For 7208/7216HUHI, 7300HUHI, and 9000HUHI series DVR, if the video encoding is H.264 or H.265, when 8 MP signal input is connected, H.264+ or H.265+ is disabled. If the video encoding is H.264+ or H.265+, when 8 MP signal input is connected, the video encoding will change to H.264 or H.265 automacally, and H.264+ or H.265+ is disabled. Event if you check Enable H.264+ or Enable H.265+ when 8 MP signal input is connected, the device will sell encode with H.264 or H.265.
• Aer enabling H.264+ or H.265+, the Bitrate Type, Video Quality, Max. Bitrate Mode, Max. Bitrate(Kbps) and Max. Bitrate Range Recommend are not congorable.
• If H.265+ is enabled, line crossing detecon and region entrance detecon are not supported.
• For the connected IP camera, the H.264+ or H.265+ should be supported by the camera and added to the DVR with the HIKVISION protocol.
• You should reboot the device to acvate the new sengs aer enabling the H.264+ or H.265+.

Step 4 Click More Sengs to congregate more parameters.

More Settings Pre-record 6s Post-record 5s Expired Time (day) 0 Redundant Record Record Audio Video Stream Main Stream OK Back

Figure 5-5 More Sengs of Record Parameters

Pre-record: The me you set to record before the scheduled me or event. For example, when an alarm triggered the recording at 10:00, if you set the pre-record me as 5

seconds, the camera records it at 9:59:55.

Post-record: The me you set to record aer the event or the scheduled me. For example, when an alarm triggered the recording ends at 11:00, if you set the post-record me as 5 seconds, it records ll 11:00:05.

Expired Time: The me for keeping the record les in the HDDs, once exceeded, the les will be deleted. The les will be saved permanently if the value is set as 0. The actual keeping me for the les should be determined by the capacity of the HDDs.

Redundant Record: Enabling redundant record means you save the record in the redundant HDD. See Chapter 5.8 Conguring Redundant Recording.

Record Audio: Enable this feature to record the sound and disable it to record the video without sound.

Video Stream: Main stream, Sub-stream and Dual-stream are selectable for recording. When you select sub-stream, you can record for a longer me with the same storage space.

NOTE

● The Redundant Record opon is only available when the HDD mode is Group.
- Redundant HDD is required for the redundant record funcon. For detailed informaon, see Chapter 14.3.2 Seng HDD Property.
- For network cameras, the parameters of Main Stream (Event) are not editable.

Step 5 Click Apply to save the sengs.

Step 6 Oponally, you can click Copy to copy the sengs to other analog channels if needed.

Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16

Figure 5-6 Copy Camera Sengs

Step 7 Set encoding parameters for sub-stream.

1) Select the Sub-Stream tab.

Camera [A1] Camera 01 Stream Type Video Resolution (maximum value is W... 352°288(CIF) Bitrate Type Constant Video Quality Medium Frame Rate Full Frame Max. Bitrate Mode General Max. Bitrate (Kbps) (max.: 3M) 512 Max. Bitrate Range Recommend... 384~640(Kbps) Video Encoding H.265

Figure 5-7 Sub-Stream Encoding

2) Select a camera in the camera drop-down list.
3) Congure the parameters.
4) Click Apply to save the setngs.
5) (Oponal) If the parameters can also be used to other cameras, click Copy to copy the sengs to other channels.

NOTE

● The resolution of sub-stream can be selected among WD1, 4CIF, and CIF.
● The minimum frame rate for the sub-stream is 1 fps.
- You can select the Video Encoding for the sub-stream of IP and analog cameras. For the analog cameras, H.264 and H.265 are selectable. For the IP cameras supporting H.265, you can select H.265 encoding mode.

Step 8 Set parameters for capture.

1) Select the Capture tab.

Record Substream Capture Camera [A1] Camera 01 Parameter Type Continuous Event Resolution 704°576(4CIF) - 704°576(4CIF) Picture Quality Medium - Medium Interval 5s - 5s

Figure 5-8 Capture Sengs

2) Select a camera from the drop-down list.
3) Congure the parameters.
4) Click Apply to save the settings.
5) (Oponal) If the parameters can also be used to other cameras, click Copy to copy the sengs to other channels.

The interval is the me period between two capturing acons. You can congregate all the parameters on this menu on your demand.

5.2 Configuring Recording and Capture Schedule

NOTE

● The DVR supports connuous, alarm, moon, moon | alarm, moon & alarm, event, and POS (for DS-7300HQHI and DS-7300/9000HUHI-K) triggered recording types.
- In this chapter, we take the record schedule procedure as an example, and the same procedure can be applied to congure schedule for recording.

Purpose

Set the record schedule, and then the camera will automatically start/stop recording according to the congured schedule.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Record/Capture > Schedule.

Record Capture Camera [M] -Camera 01 Enable Schedule Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Edit Centrusted Event Motion Airer M | A M & A PC/S None Copy Apply Back

Figure 5-9 Record Schedule

Dierent recording types are marked in dierent color icons.

Connuous: scheduled recording.

Event: recording triggered by all event triggered alarm.

Moon: recording triggered by moon detecon.

Alarm: recording triggered by alarm.

M/A: recording triggered by either moon detecon or alarm.

M&A: recording triggered by moon detecon and alarm.

POS: recording triggered by POS and alarm.

NOTE

The POS recording is supported by DS-7300HQHI and DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR only.

Step 2 Choose the camera you want to conjure in the Camera drop-down list.

Step 3 Check the checkbox of Enable Schedule.

Step 4 Congure the record schedule.

Edit the schedule

1) Click Edit.
2) In the message box, you can choose the day to which you want to set schedule.
3) To schedule an all-day recording, check the checkbox aer the All Day item.

Edit Weekday Mon All Day ✓ Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-24:00 ● Type Motion Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 ● Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 ● Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 ● Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 ● Type Continuous Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 ● Type Continuous Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 5-10 Edit Schedule- All Day

4) To arrange other schedule, leave the All Day checkbox blank and set the Start/End me.

All Day Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Start/End Time 00 00 - 00 00 Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Type Continuous Type Continuous Type Continuous Type Continuous

Figure 5-11 Edit Schedule- Set Time Period

NOTE

- Up to 8 periods can be congured for each day. And the me periods cannot be overlapped with each other.

- To enable Event, Moon, Alarm, M | A (moon or alarm), M & A (moon and alarm), and POS triggered recording, you must conjure the moon detecon sengs, alarm input sengs or VCA sengs as well. For detailed informaon, refer to Chapter 8.1, Chapter 8.7 and Chapter 9.

5) Repeat the above steps 1)-4) to schedule recording for other days in the week. If the schedule can also be set to other days, click Copy.

Copy to All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Holiday OK Cancel

Figure 5-12 Copy Schedule to Other Days

NOTE

The Holiday opon is available when you enable holiday schedule in Holiday setngs. See Chapter 5.7 Conguring Holiday Record.

6) Click OK to save the sengs and return to upper level menu.

Draw the schedule

1) Click the color icon to select a record type in the event list on the right-side of the interface.

Figure 5-13 Draw the Recording Schedule

Record Capture Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Schedule Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Edit Continuous Event Motion Alarm M | A M & A None *Note. Operation is invalid when the number of time segments exceeds the limit (8). Copy Apply Back

Figure 5-14 Draw the Capture Schedule

2) Drag the mouse on the schedule.
3) Click the other area except for the schedule table to nish and exit from the drawing.

You can repeat step 4 to set schedule for other channels. If the sengs can also be used to other channels, click Copy, and then choose the channel to which you want to copy to.

Step 5 Click Apply in the Record Schedule interface to save the settings.

5.3 Configuring Motion Detection Recording and Capture

Purpose

Follow the steps to set the moon detecon parameters. In the live view mode, once a moon detecon event takes place, the DVR can analyze it and do many acons to handle it. Enabling moon detecon funcon can trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen monitoring, audio warning, nofying the surveillance center, sending email and so on.

Step 1 Go to Menu>Camera>Moon.

Step 2 Congure Moon Detecon:

1) Choose camera you want to congure.
2) Check Enable Moon Detecon.
3) Check False Alarm Filter. Refer to Chapter 8.2 Seng PIR Camera Alarm for details.
4) Drag and draw the area for moon detecon by mouse. If you want to set the moon detecon for all the area shot by the camera, click Full Screen. To clear the motion detecon area, click Clear.

Motion Detection Camera [A3] Camera 03 Enable Motion Detection ✓ False Alarm Filter ✓ Settings Sensitivity Full Screen Clear

Figure 5-15 Moon Detecon-Mask

5) Click 📄, and the message box for channel informaon pops up.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16

Figure 5-16 Moon Detecon Sengs

6) Select the channels which you want the moon detecon event to trigger recording.
7) Click Apply to save the setngs.
8) Click OK to back to the upper level menu.
9) Exit the Moon Detection menu.

Step 3 Congure the schedule.

Please refer to the step 4 of Chapter 5.2 Conguring Recording and Capture Schedule, while you may choose Moon as the record type.

5.4 Configuring Alarm Triggered Recording and Capture

Purpose

Follow the procedure to conjure alarm triggered recording or capture.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Alarm > Alarm Input.

Alarm Status Alarm Input Alarm Output Alarm Input No. Local<-1 Alarm Name Type N.O Enable Enable One-Key Disarming Settings

Figure 5-17 Alarm Sengs- Alarm Input

Step 2 Select Alarm Input No.

Step 3 Input Alarm Name.

Step 4 Select N.O (normally open) or N.C (normally closed) for alarm type.

Step 5 Check the checkbox of Enable to enable alarm.

Alarm Status Alarm Input Alarm Output Alarm Input No. Local<-1 Alarm Name Type N.O Enable Enable One-Key Disarming Settings

Figure 5-18 Enable Alarm

Step 6 Click the button aer Sengs to set the triggered channels, arming schedule, linkage acons and PTZ linking. Refer to step 4 of Chapter 5.2 Conguring Recording and Capture Schedule for detailed operaons.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2

Figure 5-19 Alarm Handling

Step 7 Click Apply to save the sengs.

Repeat the steps from 1 to 8 to conjure other alarm input parameters.

If the sengs can also be applied to other alarm inputs, click Copy and choose the alarm input number.

Copy Alarm Input to ✓Alarm Input No. Alarm Name 10.16.1.250:8000<-1 10.16.1.250:8000<-2 10.16.1.250:8000<-3 10.16.1.250:8000<-4 10.16.1.250:8000<-5 10.16.1.250:8000<-6 10.16.1.250:8000<-7 OK Cancel

Figure 5-20 Copy Alarm Input

5.5 Configuring Event Recording and Capture

Purpose

The event triggered recording can be congured through the menu. Then events include the moon detecon, alarm and VCA events (face detecon/face capture, line crossing detecon, intrusion detecon, region entrance detecon, region exing detecon, loitering detecon, people gathering detecon, fast moving detecon, parking detecon, unaended baggage detecon, object removal detecon, audio loss exceedon detecon, sudden change of sound intensity detecon, and defocus detecon).

NOTE

• HTHI series DVR support full-channel line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon. Channels with audio support audio excepon detecon.
• For HUHI series DVR, if enhanced VCA mode is enabled, full-channel line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon are supported, but 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input are not supported; if enhanced VCA mode is disabled, 2-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon are supported, and 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input are also supported.
• DS-7200HQHI series support up to 4-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon if enhanced VCA mode is enabled. DS-7216HQHI series also support 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. Channels with audio support audio excepon detecon.
• DS-7300HQHI-K series support up to 4-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon if enhanced VCA mode is enabled, and 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. Channels with audio support audio exceedon detecon.
• For the analog channels, the line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon conict with other VCA detecon such as sudden scene change detecon, face detecon and vehicle detecon. You can only enable one funcon.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

VCA Camera [A1] Camera 01 Face Detec... Vehicle Det... Line Crossi... Intrusion De... Region Entr... Region Exit... Loitering D... People Gath... Fast Movin... Parking Det... Unattended... Object Rem... Audio Exce... Defocus De... Sudden Sc... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Rule 1 Draw Line Draw Quadnl... Clear Ali

Figure 5-21 VCA Sengs

Step 2 Select a Camera.

Step 3 Congure the detecon rules for VCA events. For details, see the step 6 in Chapter 10.3 Line Crossing Detecon.

Step 4 Click the icon 🙏 to conjure the alarm linkage acons for the VCA events.

Select Trigger Channel tab and select one or more channels which will start to record when VCA alarm is triggered.

Step 5 Click Apply to save the sengs.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 IP Camera D1 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 5-22 Set Triggered Camera of VCA Alarm

Step 6 Enter Record Schedule Setngs interface (Menu> Record> Schedule>Record Schedule), and then set Event as the record type. For details, see step 2 in Chapter 5.2 Conguring Recording and Capture Schedule.

5.6 Configuring Manual Recording and Continuous Capture

Purpose

Follow the steps to set parameters for the manual recording and connuous capture. Using manual recording and connuous capture, you need to manually cancel the record and capture. The manual recording and manual connuous capture is prior to the scheduled recording and capture.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Manual > Record.

Record Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 IP Camera D1 D2 Recording by schedule Recording by manual operation Centrinatus Motion Detection

Figure 5-23 Manual Record

Step 2 Enable manual record.

Click the status icon before camera number to change it to . ON

Or click the status icon of Analog to enable manual record of all channels.

Step 3 Disable manual record.

Click the status icon 📊 to change it to .

Or click the status icon ON of Analog to disable manual record of all channels.

i NOTE

Aer reboong all the manual records enabled are canceled.

5.7 Configuring Holiday Recording and Capture

Purpose

Follow the steps to congregate the record or capture schedule on holiday for that year. You may want to have dierent plan for recording on holiday.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Record > Holiday.

Holiday Settings No. Holiday Name Status Start Date End Date Edit 1 Holiday1 Enabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 2 Holiday2 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 3 Holiday3 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 4 Holiday4 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 5 Holiday5 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 6 Holiday6 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 7 Holiday7 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 8 Holiday8 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 9 Holiday9 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 10 Holiday10 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 11 Holiday11 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan 12 Holiday12 Disabled 1.Jan 1.Jan

Figure 5-24 Holiday Sengs

Step 2 Enable Edit Holiday schedule.

1) Click to enter the Edit interface.

Edit Holiday Name Holiday1 Enable Mode By Month Start Date Jan 1 End Date Jan 1 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 5-25 Edit Holiday Sengs

2) Check the checkbox of Enable.
3) Select Mode from the drop-down list.

There are three dierent modes for the date format to congure holiday schedule. By Month, By Week, and By Date are selectable.

4) Set the start and end date.
5) Click Apply to save sengs.
6) Click OK to exit the Edit interface.

Step 3 Congure the record schedule.

Please refer to the Chapter 5.2 Conguring Recording and Capture Schedule, while you may choose Holiday in the Schedule drop-down list, or you can draw the schedule on the meline of Holiday.

Edit Schedule Holiday All Day Start/End Time 00:00-24:00 Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Start/End Time 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK Cancel Type Motion Type Motion | Alarm Type Continuous Type Continuous Type Continuous Type Continuous Type Continuous Type Continuous Type Continuous Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 5-26 Edit Schedule-Holiday

NOTE

• Up to 8 periods can be congured for each day. And the me periods cannot be overlapped each other.
• In the me table of the channel, both holiday schedule and normal day schedule are displayed.
• Repeat the above step 4 to set Holiday schedule for other channels. If the holiday schedule can also be used to other channels, click Copy and choose the channel you want to apply the sengs.

5.8 Configuring Redundant Recording and Capture

Purpose

Enabling redundant recording and capture, which means saving the record les and captured pictures not only in the R/W HDD but also in the redundant HDD, will eecvely enhance the data safety and reliability.

Before you start

You must set the Storage mode in the HDD advanced sengs to Group before you set the HDD property to Redundant. For detailed informaon, please refer to Chapter 14.3 Managing HDD Group. There should be at least another HDD which is in Read/Write status.

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD.

Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Group Edit Delete 1 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 865GB 1 - 3 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 931GB 1 -

Figure 5-27 HDD General

Step 2 Select the HDD and click 📋 to enter the Local HDD Sengs interface.

1) Set the HDD property to Redundant.

Local HDD Settings HDD No 1 HDD Property ● R/W ● Road-only ● Redundancy Group ● 1 ● 2 ● 3 ● 4 ● 5 ● 6 ● 7 ● 8 ● 9 ● 10 ● 11 ● 12 ● 13 ● 14 ● 15 ● 16 HDD Capacity 931.51GB Apply OK Cancel

Figure 5-28 HDD General-Eding

2) Click Apply to save the setngs.
3) Click OK to back to the upper level menu.

Step 3 Go to Menu > Record > Parameters > Record.

1) Select Camera you want to conjure.
2) Click More Sengs buon.

More Settings Pre-record 5s Post-record 5s Expired Time (day) 0 Redundant Record Record Audio Video Stream Main Stream OK Back

Figure 5-29 More Sengs

3) Check the checkbox of Redundant Record.
4) Click OK to save the sengs.
5) If the encoding parameters can also be used to other channels, click Copy and choose the channel you want to apply the sengs.

5.9 Configuring HDD Group

Purpose

You can group the HDDs and save the record les in certain HDD group.

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > Advanced > Storage Mode.

Check whether the storage mode of the HDD is Group. If not, set it to Group. For detailed informaon, please refer to Chapter 14.3 Managing HDD Group.

Step 2 Select General in the le bar.

Click to enter eding interface.

Step 3 Conguring HDD group.

1) Choose a group number for the HDD group.
2) Click Apply to save your sengs.
3) Click OK to back to the upper level menu.

Step 4 Repeat the above steps to conjure more HDD groups.

Step 5 Choose the Channels which you want to save the record les in the HDD group.

1) Go to Menu > HDD > Advanced > Storage Mode.

Record on HDD Group 1 Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 Enable HDD Sleeping

Figure 5-30 HDD Advanced

2) Choose Group number in the drop-down list of Record on HDD Group
3) Check the channels you want to save in this group.
4) Click Apply to save sengs.

NOTE

Aer you have congured the HDD groups, you can congure the recording sengs following the procedure provided in Chapter 5.2-5.7.

5.10 Files Protection

Purpose

You can lock the recorded les or set the HDD property to Read-only to protect the record les from being overwrien.

Protect le by locking the record les

Step 1 Go to Menu > Export > Normal.

Normal ✓ Analog ✓ A1 ✓ A2 ✓ A3 ✓ A4 ✓ A5 ✓ A6 ✓ A7 ✓ A8 ✓ A9 ✓ A10 ✓ A11 ✓ A12 ✓ A13 ✓ A14 ✓ A15 ✓ A16 ✓ IP Camera ✓ D1 ✓ D2 ✓ D3 ✓ D4 ✓ D5 ✓ D6 ✓ D7 ✓ D8 ✓ D9 ✓ D10 ✓ D11 ✓ D12 ✓ D13 ✓ D14 ✓ D15 ✓ D16 ✓ D17 ✓ D18 Start/End time of record 02-04-2016 13:40:49 - 02-17-2016 10:23:16 Record Mode Main Stream Record Type All File Type All Start Time 02-17-2016 00:00:00 End Time 02-17-2016 23:59:59

Figure 5-31 Export

Step 2 Select the channels you want to investigate by checking the checkbox to .

Step 3 Congure the record mode, record type, le type, start me and end me.

Step 4 Click Search to show the results.

Search result Cancere No Sled/End Time Size Play Lock D1 08-12-2015 15:29:30-16:34 1016.0000 D1 08-12-2015 15:34:55-17:37... 1016.0000 D1 08-12-2015 12:17:24-18:30... 1016.0000 D1 08-12-2015 13:09:34-18:45... 1016.4660 D1 08-12-2015 12:45:20-18:55... 216.9500 D1 09-12-2015 08:33:17-09:25... 801.9450 D1 09-12-2015 09:25:24-09:27... 43.7650 D1 09-12-2015 09:30:12-19:08... 967.7250 D1 09-12-2015 10:08:33-19:48... 1016.3960 D1 09-12-2015 10:46:03-11:33... 1016.5380 D1 09-12-2015 11:23:36-12:39... 1017.3680 D1 09-12-2015 12:08:39-12:34... 1017.1250 D1 09-12-2015 12:35:34-13:32... 1017.8760 D1 09-12-2015 13:12:38-13:48... 1016.6660 D1 09-12-2015 13:48:42-14:35... 1017.3050 D1 09-12-2015 14:25:44-15:32... 1016.5360 D1 09-12-2015 15:03:52-16:38... 1016.7760 D1 09-12-2015 15:39:22-18:35... 1017.3050 Total: 22 P 7/7 Total size: 68 Export All Export Back

Figure 5-32 Export-Search Result

Step 5 Protect the record les.

1) Find the record les you want to protect, and then click the indicang that the le is locked.

icon which will turn to

The record les of which the recording is sll not completed cannot be locked.

2) Click 🔍 to change it to 🔍 to unlock the le and the le is not protected.

Protect le by seng HDD property to Read-only

Before you start

To edit HDD property, you need to set the storage mode of the HDD to Group. See Chapter 14.3 Managing HDD Group.

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > General.

Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Group Edit Delete 1 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 865GB 1 - 3 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 931GB 1 -

Figure 5-33 HDD General

Step 2 Click to edit the HDD you want to protect.

Local HDD Settings HDD No: 1 HDD Property ● R/W ● Read-only ● Rodundancy Group ● 1 ● 2 ● 3 ● 4 ● 5 ● 6 ● 7 ● 8 ● 9 ● 10 ● 11 ● 12 ● 13 ● 14 ● 15 ● 16 HDD Capacity 931.51GB Apply OK Cancel

Figure 5-34 HDD General- Eding

Step 3 Set the HDD to Read-only.

Step 4 Click OK to save sengs and back to the upper level menu.

NOTE

• You cannot save any les in a Read-only HDD. If you want to save les in the HDD, change the property to R/W.
• If there is only one HDD and is set to Read-only, the DVR cannot record any les. Only live view mode is available.
• If you set the HDD to Read-only when the DVR is saving les in it, then the le will be saved in next R/W HDD. If there is only one HDD, the recording will be stopped.

5.11 One-Key Enabling and Disabling H.264+/H.265+ for Analog Cameras

Purpose

You can one-key enable or disable H.264+/H.265+ for the analog cameras.

Task 1: One-Key Enabling H.264+/H.265+ for All Analog Cameras

Step 1 Go to Menu > Record > Advanced.

Advanced Settings H.264+/H.265+ for All the Analo... Enable Disable Overwrite

Figure 5-35 Advanced Sengs (for DS-7200HUHI and HTHI series DVR)

Advanced Settings H.264+/H.265+ for All the Analog... Enable Disable 1080P Lite Mode Overwrite

Figure 5-36 Advanced Sengs (for HQHI series DVR)

Advanced Settings H.264+/H.265+ for All the Analog... Enable Disable Overwrite eSATA eSATA1 Usage Record/Capture

Figure 5-37 Advanced Sengs (for DS-7300/9000HUHI series DVR)

Step 2 Click Enable to enable H.264+/H.265+ for all the analog cameras and the following aenon box pops up.

Attention Enable H.264+/H.265+ for all analog cameras and reboot the device? Yes No

Figure 5-38 Aenon Box

Step 3 Click Yes to enable the funcon and reboot the device to have new sengs taken eect.

Task 2: One-Key Disabling H.264+/H.265+ for All Analog Cameras

Step 1 Go to Menu > Record > Advanced.

Step 2 Click Disable to disable H.264+/H.265+ for all the analog cameras and the following aenon box pops up.

Attention Disable H.264+/H.265+ for all analog cameras and reboot the device? Yes No

Figure 5-39 Aenon Box

Step 3 Click Yes to enable the funcon and reboot the device to have new sengs taken eect.

5.12 Configuring 1080P Lite

Purpose

When the 1080P Lite Mode is enabled, the encoding resolution at 1080P Lite (real-me) is supported. If not, up to 1080P (non-real-me) is supported.

This chapter is applicable to HQHI series DVR.

Task 1: Enabling the 1080P Lite Mode

Step 1 Go to Menu > Record > Advanced.

Advanced Settings H.264+A.H.265+ for All the Analo _ Enable Disable 1080P Lite Mode Overwrite

Figure 5-40 Advanced Interface

Step 2 Check the checkbox of 1080P Lite Mode and click Apply to pop up the attenon box. Aer enabling 1080p lite mode, the 3 MP signal is not accessible to analog channel.

Attention After enabling 1080p lite mode, the 3MP signal is not accessible to analog channel. New settings will take effect after reboot. Click "Yes" to reboot now or "No" to restore the old settings. Yes No

Figure 5-41 Aenon

Step 3 Click Yes to reboot the device to have new sengs taken eect.

Task 2: Disabling the 1080P Lite Mode

Step 1 Go to Menu > Record > Advanced.

Step 2 Uncheck the checkbox of 1080P Lite Mode and click Apply. The following attenon box pops up.

Attention After disabling 1080p file mode, the 1080p stream will not be real-time. New settings will take effect after reboot. Click "Yes" to reboot now or "No" to restore the old settings. Yes No

Figure 5-42 Aenon

Step 3 Click Yes to reboot the device to acvate the new sengs or No to restore the old sengs.

Chapter 6 Playback

6.1 Playing Back Record Files

6.1.1 Instant Playback

Purpose

Play back the recorded video les of a specic channel in the live view mode. Channel switch is supported.

Instant playback by channel

Choose a channel in live view mode and click the 📄uon in the quick seng toolbar.

i NOTE

In the instant playback mode, only record les recorded during the last ve minutes on this channel will be played back.

Four-panel composite image showing a multi-lane highway with vehicles and traffic, no visible text or symbols.

Figure 6-1 Instant Playback Interface

6.1.2 Playing Back by Normal Search

Playback by Channel

Enter the Playback interface.

Right click a channel in live view mode and select Playback from the menu, as shown in the following gure:

Common Menu Menu Single Screen Multi-screen Previous Screen Next Screen Start Auto-switch Start Recording Add IP Camera Playback PTZ Control Output Mode Aux Monitor

Figure 6-2 Right-click Menu under Live View

Playback by Time

Purpose

Play back video les recorded in specied me duraon. Mul-channel simultaneous playback and channel switch are supported.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Playback.

Step 2 Check the checkbox of channel(s) in the channel list and then double-click to select a date on the calendar.

Dec 2014 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 _______________________________

Figure 6-3 Playback Calendar

NOTE

If there are record les for that camera in that day, in the calendar, the icon for that day is displayed as . Otherwise it is displayed as .

Playback Interface

You can select the main stream or sub-stream from the drop-down list for playback.

You can also use the toolbar in the boom part of Playback interface to control playing progress, as shown in the following gure.

Normal Main Stream Max. Came... Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 IPdome IPCamera 02 IPCamera 03 IPCamera 04 IPCamera 05 IPCamera 06 Jul 2017 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 8:11:2017 10:30:51 -- 07:26:2017 13:50:46 11:55 Now Event

Figure 6-4 Playback Interface

Select the channel(s) if you want to switch playback to another channel or execute simultaneous playback of mulple channels.

07-11-2017 10:30:51 - 07-26-2017 12:59:46 11:17:55

Figure 6-5 Toolbar of Playback

Table 6-1 Detailed Explanaon of Playback Toolbar

Button	Operation	Button	Operation	Button	Operation
	Audio on/Mute		Start/Stop clipping		Lock File
[42A0]	Add default tag	[085X]	Add customized tag		File management for video clips, capturedpictures, locked les and tags
	Reverse play/Pause	[SWCA]	Stop	[4KVS]	Digital Zoom
[HT0]	30s forward	[T8RV]	30s reverse	[ST2X]	Pause/Play
[TH0]	Fast forward	[AXBA]	Previous day	[17BH]	Slow forward
[SWHH]	Full Screen	[24KG]	Exit	[OKZZ]	Next day
[HHY0]	Save the clips	[W4WK]	Process bar	[W9XH]	Scaling up/down the me line
[KZ7]	Capture Picture		Enable/Disable POS informaon overlay

NOTE

• The 01-01-2015 to 16:34:30, 7:15:16:19 me of the record les.
• represents normal recording (manual or schedule); ■ represents event recording (moon, alarm, moon | alarm, moon & alarm).
• Playback progress bar: use the mouse to click any point of the progress bar to locate special frames.
• The POS overlay funcon is supported by DS-7300HQHI and DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR only. When the POS is enabled when playing back, the POS informaon will be overlaid on the video. And the keyword searching is supported.
  ● The picture capture funcon is supported by DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR only.

6.1.3 Playing Back by Event Search

Purpose

Play back record les on one or several channels searched out by restrictive event type (moon detecon, alarm input or VCA). Channel switch is supported.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Playback.

Step 2 Click and select to enter the Event Playback interface.

Step 3 Select Alarm Input, Moon, VCA as the event type, and specify the start me and end me for search.

Major Ty... Motion Camera Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 Camera 05 Camera 06 Camera 07 Start Time 14-07-2015 00:00:00 End Time 14-07-2015 23:59:59 Search

Figure 6-6 Video Search by Moon Detecon

Step 4 Click Search, and the record les matching the search conditions will be displayed on a list.

Step 5 Select and click 📄 on to play back the record les.

You can click Back buon to return to the search interface.

If there is only one channel triggered, clicking 📄uon takes you to Full-screen Playback interface of this channel.

If several channels are triggered, clicking 📄 buon takes you to the Synchronous Playback interface. Check ⚙ checkbox to select one channel for playback or select mulple channels for synchronous playback.

NOTE

The maximum number of channels for synchronous playback supported varies to dierent models.

Synch Playback Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 OK Cancel

Figure 6-7 Select Channels for Synchronous Playback

Step 6 On the Event Playback interface, you can select the main stream or sub-stream from the drop-down list for playback.

The toolbar in the boom part of Playback interface can be used to control playing process.

Event Main Stream Sour... Start Time Play D1 13:37:00 D1 13:37:59 D1 13:38:15 D1 13:39:36 D1 13:40:51 D1 13:41:28 D1 13:41:48 D1 13:42:10 D1 13:42:29 D1 13:42:58 D1 13:43:15 D1 13:44:29 D1 13:45:29 D1 13:45:52 D1 13:49:26 Total: 20 P: 1/1 Pre-play 30s Post-play 30s Back

Figure 6-8 Interface of Playback by Event

Pre-play and post-play can be congured for the playback of event triggered record les.

Pre-play: The me you set to play back before the event. For example, when an alarm triggered the recording at 10:00, if you set the pre-play me as 5 seconds, the video plays back from 9:59:55.

Post-play: The me you set to play back aer the event. For example, when an alarm triggered the recording ends at 11:00, if you set the post-play me as 5 seconds, the video plays back II 11:00:05.

Step 7 You can click < or > button to select the previous or next event. Please refer to Table 6-1 for the descripon of buons on the toolbar.

6.1.4 Playing Back by Tag

Purpose

Video tag allows you to record related informaon like people and locaon of a certain me point during playback. You are also allowed to use video tag(s) to search for record les and posion me point.

Before playing back by tag

Step 1 Go to Menu >Playback.

Step 2 Search and play back the record le(s). Refer to Chapter 6.1.2 Playing Back by Normal Search for the detailed informaon about searching and playback of the record les.

Normal Main Stream Max. Came... Min. Came... Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 IPdoms IPCamera 02 IPCamera 03 IPCamera 04 IPCamera 05 IPCamera 06 Jul 2017 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 8/11-2017 10:20:51 - 07:26-2017 13:50:49 11:17:55

Figure 6-9 Interface of Playback by Time

Click ☐ uon to add default tag.

Click 📄uon to add customized tag and input tag name.

Add Tag Tag Time 09-12-2015 08:53:41 Tag Name 1 OK Cancel

Figure 6-10 Add Tag

NOTE

Max. 64 tags can be added to a single video le.

Step 3 Tag management.

Click 📄uon to check, edit and delete tag(s).

File Management Video Clips Playback Capture Locked File Tag Camer... Tag Name Time Edit Delete D1 TAG 07-25-2017 11:17:28 # D1 TAG 07-25-2017 11:17:34 # D1 TAG 07-25-2017 13:48:01 # D1 TAG 07-25-2017 16:16:51 # D1 1 07-25-2017 18:06:03 # Total: 5 P: 1/1 Cancel

Figure 6-11 Tag Management Interface

Steps

Step 1 Select Tag from the drop-down list in the Playback interface.

Step 2 Choose channels, edit start me and end me, and then click Search to enter Search Result interface.

NOTE

You can enter keyword in the textbox Keyword search the tag on your command.

Tag Main Stream Cam... Tag Name Play D1 TAG D1 TAG D1 TAG D1 1 D1 TAG D1 TAG D1 1 Total: 6 P: 1/1 Pre-play 30s Post-play 30s Back 11:17:32 Norms Event

Figure 6-12 Video Search by Tag

Step 3 Click ☐ buon to play back the le.

You can click the Back buon to return to the search interface.

i NOTE

● Pre-play and post-play can be congured.
- You can click or button to select the previous or next tag. Please refer to Table 6-1 for the descripon of buons on the toolbar.

6.1.5 Playing Back by Smart Search

Purpose

The smart playback funcon provides an easy way to get through the less eecve informaon. When you select the smart playback mode, the system will analyze the video containing the moon or VCA informaon, mark it with green color and play it in the normal speed while the video without moon will be played in the 16-me speed. The smart playback rules and areas are congorable.

Before you start

To get the smart search result, the corresponding event type must be enabled and congured on the IP camera. Here we take the intrusion detecon as an example.

Step 1 Log in the IP camera by the web browser, and enable the intrusion detecon by checking the checkbox of it. You may enter the moon detecon conguraon interface by Conguraon > Advanced Conguraon > Events > Intrusion Detecon.

Motion Detection Video Tampering Alarm Input Alarm Output Exception Face Detection Audio Exception Detection Intrusion Detection Defocus Detection Scene Change Detection Enable Intrusion Detection

Figure 6-13 Seng Intrusion Detecon on IP Camera

Step 2 Congure the required parameters of intrusion detecon, including area, arming schedule and linkage methods. Refer to the user manual of smart IP camera for detailed instrucons.

Steps

Step 1 Go to Menu > Playback.

Step 2 Select the Smart in the drop-down list on the top-le side.

Step 3 Select a camera in the camera list.

Smart Main Stream Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 IPdome IPCamera 02 IPCamera 03 IPCamera 04 IPCamera 05 IPCamera 06 Juli 2017 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 NT-11-2017 10:20:53 - 07:59:2017 13:59:46 Normo Event Smart

Figure 6-14 Smart Playback Interface

Step 4 Select a date in the calendar and click the ☐uon to play. Refer to Table 6-2 for the descripons of the buons on the Smart Playback Toolbar.

Table 6-2 Detailed Explanaon of Smart Playback Toolbar

Button	Operation	Button	Operation	Button	Operation
	Draw line for the line crossing detecon		Draw quadrilateral for the intrusion detecon		Draw rectangle for the intrusion detecon
	Set full screen for moon detecon		Clear all		Start/Stop clipping
	File management for video clips		Stop playing	[VK3X]	Pause playing /Play
	Smart sengs		Search matched video les		Filter video les by seng the target characters
	Show/Hide VCA informaon

Step 5 Set the rules and areas for smart search of VCA event or moon event.

● Line Crossing Detecon

Select the ☐ion, and click on the image to specify the start point and end point of the line.

- Intrusion Detecon

Click the ☐ion, and specify 4 points to set a quadrilateral region for intrusion detecon. Only one region can be set.

- Moon Detecon

Click the ☐ion and then click and draw the mouse to set the detecon area manually. You can also click the ☐ion to set the full screen as the detecon area.

Step 6 Click ☐ congregate the smart sengs.

Smart Settings Skip the Non-R... Play Non-Relat... 8 Play Related Vi... 1 Pre-play (s) 5 Post-play (s) 5 OK Cancel

Figure 6-15 Smart Sengs

Skip the Non-Related Video: The non-related video will not be played if this funcon is enabled.

Play Non-Related Video at: Set the speed to play the non-related video. Max. 8/4/2/1 are selectable.

Play Related Video at: Set the speed to play the related video. Max. 8/4/2/1 are selectable.

NOTE

Pre-play and post-play is not available for the moon event type.

Step 7 Click search and play the matched video les.

Step 8 (Oponal) Click 📋 to Iter the searched video les by seng the target characters, including the gender and age of the human and whether he/she wears glasses.

Result Filter Enable Gender All Ages All Glasses All OK Cancel

Figure 6-16 Set Result Filter

NOTE

The Result Filter funcon is supported by the IP camera only.

Step 9 (Oponal) For the cameras supporting VCA, click to show the VCA informaon.

Then the congured line or quadrilateral in VCA conguraon and target frame(s) will be shown on the playback interface. Click 📄 to hide the VCA informaon.

Smart Main Stream Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 IPdome IPCamera 02 Dec 2016 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 01-01:1870:00:00:42 - 12:06:2016 11:13:29 09:43:51

Figure 6-17 Show VCA Informaon

NOTE

● This funcon is supported by HUHI and HTHI series DVR.
- In smart playback, both the analog and IP cameras support VCA informaon overlay.
- If the connected camera does not support VCA, the icon is grey and unavailable.
- For the analog cameras, the VCA informaon includes line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon. For the IP cameras, the VCA informaon includes all the VCA detecons of smart IP camera.

6.1.6 Playing Back by System Logs

Purpose

Play back record le(s) associated with channels aer searching system logs.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Log Informaon > Log Search.

Log Search Start Time 01-07-2015 00:00:00 End Time 16-07-2015 23:59:59 Major Type All Minor Type Alarm Input Alarm Output Motion Detection Started Motion Detection Stopped Video Tampering Detection Started Video Tampering Detection Stopped Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Stopped Line Crossing Detection Alarm Started Export All Search Back

Figure 6-18 System Log Search Interface

Step 2 Set search me and type and click Search buon.

Search Result No. Major Type Time Minor Type Parameter Play Details 1 Information 10-07-2015 09:53:59 Local HDD Infor... N/A 2 Operation 10-07-2015 09:53:59 Power On N/A 3 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:05 Start Recording N/A 4 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:08 Local Operation... N/A 5 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:25 HDD S.M.A.R.T. N/A 6 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Start Recording N/A 7 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Local Operation... N/A 8 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Local Operation... N/A 9 Exception 10-07-2015 09:55:32 IP Camera Disco... N/A 10 Information 10-07-2015 10:04:09 System Running... N/A Total: 1690 P: 1/17 Export Back

Figure 6-19 Result of System Log Search

Step 3 Choose a log with record le and click ☐buon to enter Playback interface.

If there is no record le at the me point of the log, the message box "No result found" will pop up.

Step 4 Playback management.

The toolbar in the boom part of Playback interface can be used to control playing process.

Highway scene with multiple lanes, vehicles, and a red double-decker bus, no visible text or symbols

Figure 6-20 Interface of Playback by Log

6.1.7 Playing Back by Sub-Periods

Purpose

The video les can be played in mulple sub-periods simultaneously on the screens.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Playback.

Step 2 Select Sub-periods from the drop-down list in the upper-le corner of the page to enter the Sub-periods Playback interface.

Step 3 Select a date and start playing the video le.

Step 4 Select the Split-screen Number from the drop-down list. Up to 16 screens are congorable.

Sub-periods Main Stre... 01-20-2016 Wed 00:00:39 01-20-2016 Wed 02:48:16 01-20-2016 Wed 05:35:54 01-20-2016 Wed 08:23:32 Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 Camera 05 Camera 06 Camera 07 Split-scr... 4 Jan 2016 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 03-22-1970 17:24:02 -- 01-26-2016 20:10:45 00:00:40 Normal Event

Figure 6-21 Interface of Sub-periods Playback

i NOTE

According to the dened number of split-screens, the video les on the selected date can be divided into average segments for playback. E.g., if there are video les exisng between 16:00 and

22:00, and the 6-screen display mode is selected, then it can play the video les for 1 hour on each screen simultaneously.

6.1.8 Playing Back External File

Purpose

Perform the following steps to look up and play back les in the external devices.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Playback.

Step 2 Select the External File in the drop-down list on the top-le side.

The les are listed in the right-side list.

You can click the Refresh the le list.

Step 3 Select and click the ☐ buon to play back it.

External File Device USB Flash - Name File Type *.mp4 Name Play Final Data ch01_20150... ch02_20150... Refresh

Figure 6-22 Interface of External File Playback

6.1.9 Playing Back Pictures

NOTE

This chapter is only applicable to DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR.

Purpose

The captured pictures stored in the HDDs of the device can be searched and viewed.

Step 1 Enter Playback interface.

Step 2 Select Picture from the drop-down list in the upper-le corner of the page to enter the Picture Playback interface.

Step 3 Check checkbox to select the channel(s) and specify the start me and end me for search.

Step 4 Click Search to enter Search Result interface.

NOTE

Up to 4000 pictures can be displayed each me.

Step 5 Choose a picture you want to view and click 📊buon.

You can click Back to return to the search interface.

Picture Ca... Time Play D1 20:33:17 D1 11:18:11 D1 11:18:11 Total: 3 P: 1/1 Back

Figure 6-23 Result of Picture Playback

Step 6 The toolbar in the boom part of Playback interface can be used to control playing process.

Figure 6-24 Picture Playback Toolbar

Table 6-3 Detailed Explanaon of Picture Playback Toolbar

Button	Function	Button	Function	Button	Function	Button	Function
	Play reverse		Play		Previous picture		Next picture

6.2 Auxiliary Functions of Playback

6.2.1 Playing Back Frame by Frame

Purpose

Play video les frame by frame, in order to check image details of the video when abnormal events happen.

Step 1 Go to Playback interface and click buon 📁 unl the speed changes to Single frame.

Step 2 One click on the playback screen represents playback or adverse playback of one frame. You can use buon i-toolbar to stop the playing.

6.2.2 Digital Zoom

Step 1 Click the ☐ on the playback control bar to enter Digital Zoom interface.

Step 2 You can zoom in the image to dierent proporons (1 to16X) by moving the sliding bar from 📄. You can also scroll the mouse wheel to control the zoom in/out.

Highway traffic scene with multiple lanes, vehicles, and a red bus in motion (no visible text or signage)

Figure 6-25 Draw Area for Digital Zoom

Step 3 Right-click the image to exit the digital zoom interface.

6.2.3 Reverse Playback of Multi-Channel

Purpose

You can play back record les of mul-channel reversely. Up to 16-ch simultaneous reverse playback is supported.

Step 1 Go to Menu >Playback.

Step 2 Check more than one checkboxes to select multiple channels and click to select a date on the calendar.

Normal Main Stre.1 Max. Ca... Min. Ca... Camera 01 Camera 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 Camera 05 Camera 06 Camera 07 Camera 08 Jan 2016 S M T W T F S 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 03:22-2016 17:24:02 - 01:26-2018 20:26:45 18:57:40 Normal Event

Figure 6-26 4-ch Synchronous Playback Interface

Step 3 Click play back the record les reversely.

i NOTE

For 7304/8104HUHI series DVR, at least 2-ch 8 MP mul-channel playback is supported. For HUHI series DVR with 8 video inputs, at least 4-h 8 MP mul-channel playback is supported. For HUHI series DVR with 16 video inputs, at least 8-h 8 MP mul-channel playback is supported.

6.2.4 File Management

Purpose

You can manage the video clips, captured pictures in playback, locked les and tags you have added in the playback mode.

Step 1 Enter the playback interface.

Step 2 Click 📂 on the toolbar to enter the le management interface.

File Management Video Clips Playback Capture Locked File Tag Camera No. Start/End Time Size D1 12-08-2014 15:46:00--15:46:17 4081.16KB D1 12-08-2014 15:46:19--15:46:21 909.89KB D1 12-08-2014 15:46:22--15:46:24 897.31KB Total: 3 P: 1/1 Total size: 0B Export All Export Cancel Camera with clip recording: 1 Start time: 12-08-2014 15:46:00 End time: 12-08-2014 15:46:17 Selected clips: 0

Figure 6-27 File Management

Step 3 You can view the saved video clips, captured playback pictures, lock/unlock the les and edit the tags which you added in the playback mode.

Step 4 If required, select the items and click Export All or Export to export the clips/pictures/les/tags to local storage device.

Chapter 7 Backup

7.1 Backing up Record Files

Before you start

Please insert the backup device(s) into the device.

7.1.1 Backing up by Normal Video/Picture Search

Purpose

The record les or pictures can be backed up to various devices, such as USB devices (USB ash drives, USB HDDs, USB writer), SATA writer and e-SATA HDD.

Backup using USB ash drives and USB HDDs

Step 1 Go to Menu > Export > Normal/Picture.

Step 2 Select the cameras to search.

Step 3 Set search condion and click Search buon to enter the search result interface.

Normal ✓ Analog ✓ A1 ✓ A2 ✓ A3 ✓ A4 ✓ A5 ✓ A6 ✓ A7 ✓ A8 ✓ IP Camera ✓ D1 ✓ D2 Start/End time of record 01-01-2015 00:00:23 -- 16-07-2015 15:09:21 Record Mode Main Stream Record Type All File Type All Start Time 01-07-2015 00:00:00 End Time 16-07-2015 23:59:59 Search Back

Figure 7-1 Normal Video Search for Backup

Step 4 The matched video les are displayed in Chart or List display mode.

Click ☐ to play the record le if you want to check it.

Check the checkbox before the video les you want to back up.

The size of the currently selected les is displayed in the lower-le corner of the window.

Search result Chart List ■ Camera No. Start/End Time Size Play Lock A1 10-07-2015 09:54:06... 569.39MB A1 10-07-2015 18:18:30... 24.41MB A1 13-07-2015 11:00:53... 412.54MB A1 13-07-2015 16:54:28... 577.05MB A1 13-07-2015 22:31:39... 1014.32MB A1 14-07-2015 08:25:26... 605.48MB A1 14-07-2015 14:20:28... 408.62MB A1 14-07-2015 18:19:57... 1014.42MB A1 15-07-2015 04:11:25... 1014.38MB A1 15-07-2015 13:59:43... 1014.12MB A1 15-07-2015 23:47:30... 1014.20MB A1 16-07-2015 09:40:23... 683.24MB A2 13-07-2015 16:54:28... 1567.70KB Total: 99 P: 1/1 Total size: 0B Export All Export Back

Figure 7-2 Result of Normal Video Search for Backup

Step 5 Select video les from the Chart or List to export, and click the buon Export to enter the Export interface.

You can also click Export All to select all the video les for backup and enter the Export interface.

Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 *.mp4;*.zip Refresh Save Type MP4 Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play Final Data Folder 01-12-2013 09:29:56 ch01_2015071600... 992.56MB File 16-07-2015 14:12:16 ch02_2015071613... 76.55MB File 16-07-2015 14:13:22 Free Space 6357.23MB New Folder Format Export Back

Figure 7-3 Export by Normal Video Search using USB Flash Drive

Step 6 Select the backup device from the drop-down list and you can also select the le format to liter the les exisng in the backup device.

Step 7 Select the saving type.

Step 8 Click the buon Export on the Export interface to start the backup process.

1) On the pop-up message box, click the radio buon to export the video les, log or the player to the backup device.

2) Click OK to conrm.

Export Video and Log Video and Pla... Player OK Cancel

Figure 7-4 Select File or Player for Backup

Step 9 A prompt message will pop up aer the backup process is complete. Click OK to conrm.

Export Export finished. OK

Figure 7-5 Export Finished

i NOTE

The backup of pictures using USB writer or SATA writer has the same operang instrucons. Please refer to steps described above.

7.1.2 Backing up by Event Search

Purpose

Back up event-related record les using USB devices (USB ash drives, USB HDDs, USB writer), SATA writer or eSATA HDD. Quick Backup and Normal Backup are supported.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Export > Event.

Step 2 Select the cameras to search.

Step 3 Select the event type to alarm input, moon, VCA, or POS (for DS-7300HQHI and DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR).

Event Major Type Motion Record Mode Main Stream Start Time 02-17-2016 03:00:00 End Time 02-17-2016 23:59:59 Pre-play 30s Post-play 30s Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D16 D16 D17 D18 Search Back

Figure 7-6 Event Search for Backup

Step 4 Set search condion and click Search buon to enter the search result interface. The matched video les are displayed in Chart or List display mode.

Step 5 Select video les from the Chart or List interface to export.

Search result Chart List Source Camera No.HDD Event Time Size Play D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 17:51:48-... 4535.04KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 17:57:53-... 2452.46KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 17:59:32-... 2673.78KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:00:08-... 2469.02KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:00:47-... 2485.31KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:01:57-... 2459.40KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:04:53-... 2528.10KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:06:21-... 2608.41KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:06:43-... 2826.09KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:07:26-... 3129.92KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:07:59-... 3160.69KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:08:35-... 2892.27KB D1 D1 1 13-07-2015 18:13:56-... 3035.90KB Total: 569 P: 1/6 Total size: 0B Export All Export Back

Figure 7-7 Result of Event Search

Step 6 Export the video les. Please refer to step5 of Chapter 7.1.1 Backing up by Normal Video/Picture Search for details.

7.1.3 Backing up Video Clips

Purpose

You may also select video clips in playback mode to export directly during Playback, using USB devices (USB ash drives, USB HDDs, USB writer), or SATA writer.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Playback.

Step 2 During playback, use buons record le(s).

or in the playback toolbar to start or stop clipping

Step 3 Click enter the le management interface.

File Management Video Clips Playback Capture Locked File Tag Camera No. Start/End Time Size D1 07-25-2017 11:17:30-11:18:39 16.88MB D1 07-25-2017 11:18:39-11:57:37 557.09MB D1 07-25-2017 13:07:12-13:40:58 481.29MB D1 07-25-2017 13:40:58-13:48:01 101.53MB D1 07-25-2017 14:36:01-14:51:51 226.68MB D1 07-25-2017 14:51:51-16:02:46 1014.17MB D1 07-25-2017 16:02:46-16:15:37 178.31MB Total: 7 P: 1/1 Camera with clip recording: 5 Start time: 07-25-2017 11:17:30 End time: 07-25-2017 11:18:39 Selected clips: 0 Total size: 0B Export All Export Cancel

Figure 7-8 Video Clips Export Interface

Step 4 Export the video clips in playback. Please refer to step5 of Chapter 7.1.1 Backing up by Normal Video/Picture Search for details.

7.2 Managing Backup Devices

Management of USB ash drives, USB HDDs and eSATA HDDs

Step 1 Enter the Export interface.

Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 *.mp4;*.zip Refresh SaveType MP4 Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play Final Data Folder 01-12-2013 09:29:56 ch01_2015071600... 992.56MB File 16-07-2015 14:12:16 ch02_2015071613... 76.55MB File 16-07-2015 14:13:22 Free Space 6357.23MB New Folder Format Export Back

Figure 7-9 Storage Device Management

Step 2 Backup device management.

Click New Folder buon if you want to create a new folder in the backup device.

Select a record le or folder in the backup device and click button on if you want to delete it.

Click Erase buon if you want to erase the les from a re-writable CD/DVD.

Click Format buon to format the backup device.

NOTE

If the inserted storage device is not recognized:

• Click the Refresh buon.
• Reconnect device.
• Check for compatibility from vendor.

Chapter 8 Alarm Settings

8.1 Setting Motion Detection

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Moon.

Motion Detection Camera [A3] Camera 03 Enable Motion Detection ✓ False Alarm Filter ✓ Settings Sensitivity Full Screen Clear

Figure 8-1 Moon Detecon Setup Interface

Step 2 Select a camera you want to set up moon detecon.

Step 3 Set detecon area and sensitivity.

Check checkbox to enable moon detecon. Use the mouse to draw detecon area(s) or click Full Screen to set the detecon area to be the full screen and drag the sensitivity bar to set sensitivity.

Click 📄 to set alarm response acons.

Motion Detection Camera [A3] Camera 03 Enable Motion Detection ✓ False Alarm Filter ✓ Settings Sensitivity Full Screen Clear

Figure 8-2 Set Detecon Area and Sensitivity

Step 4 Click Trigger Channel tab and select one or more channels which will start to record or become full-screen monitoring when moon alarm is triggered.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16

Figure 8-3 Set Trigger Camera of Moon Detecon

Step 5 Set arming schedule of the channel.

Select Arming Schedule tab to set the channel's arming schedule.

Choose one day of a week and up to eight me periods can be set within each day. Or you can click the Copy buon to copy the me period sengs to other day(s).

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Settings Trigger Channel Aiming Schedule Linkage Action Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 8-4 Set Arming Schedule of Moon Detecon

Step 6 Click Linkage Acon tab to set up alarm response acons of moon alarm (please refer to Chapter 8.8 Seng Alarm Response Acons).

Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule of other days of a week.

Click the OK buon to complete the moon detecon seings of the channel.

Step 7 If you want to set moon detecon for another channel, repeat the above steps or just copy the above sengs to it.

NOTE

You are not allowed to copy the "Trigger Channel" acon.

8.2 Setting PIR Camera Alarm

Purpose

DVR can receive the PIR (Passive Infrared) alarm of the analog cameras supporting the function via coaxial communication. You can enable false alarm ler for the moon detection of the PIR cameras. Then only when the moon detection events and PIR events are both triggered, the moon detection alarm will be triggered, and the alarm indicator will light on for the PIR cameras supporting enabling alarm indicator.

Before you start

Connect the PIR camera to the DVR. Congure White Light as Alarm and Trigger Mode as DVR for the camera OSD.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Moon.

Motion Detection Camera [A3] Camera 03 Enable Motion Detection ✓ False Alarm Filter ✓ Settings Sensitivity Full Screen Clear

Figure 8-5 Moon Detecon

Step 2 Select the connected PIR camera.

Step 3 Check Enable Moon Detecon.

Step 4 Check False Alarm Filter to enable PIR moon detecon. The message box pops up as below.

Attention The alarm accuracy is related to the camera PIR detection range. OK

Figure 8-6 Note

Step 5 Click OK to enable PIR moon detecon. Then only when the moon detecon events and PIR events are both triggered, the moon detecon alarm will be triggered.

Step 6 Set detecon area and sensitivity. Refer to step 3 of Chapter 8.1 Seng Moon Detecon.

Step 7 Click 🙏 to set moon detecon alarm response acons. Refer to step 4 of Chapter 8.1 Seng Moon Detecon.

Step 8 Click Apply to save the sengs.

NOTE

● This funcon is only applicable to Hikvision PIR analog cameras.
● The PIR alarm does not support detecon area conguraon. It is full screen by default.
● The PIR alarm does not support sensitivity conguraon.
- If you disable false alarm lter, only when the moon detecon events are triggered, the moon detecon alarm will be triggered. The PIR alarm will not be considered.

8.3 Setting Sensor Alarms

Purpose

Set up handling method of an external sensor alarm.

Step 9 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Alarm > Alarm Input.

Alarm Status Alarm Input Alarm Output Alarm Input No. Local<-1 Alarm Name Type N.O Enable Enable One-Key Disarming Settings

Figure 8-7 Alarm Input Sengs Interface

Step 10 Set the handling method of the selected alarm input.

Check the Enable checkbox and click 📄uon to set its alarm response acons.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 8-8 Set Arming Schedule of Alarm Input

Step 11 Select Trigger Channel tab and select one or more channels which will start to record or become full-screen monitoring when an external alarm input is triggered.

Step 12 Select Arming Schedule tab to set the channel's arming schedule.

Select one day of a week and maximum eight me periods can be set within each day.

NOTE

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Step 13 Select Linkage Acon tab to set up alarm response acons of the alarm input (Refer to Chapter 8.8 Seng Alarm Response Acons).

Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also use Copy buon to copy an arming schedule to other days.

Step 14 (Oponal) Select PTZ Linking tab and set PTZ linkage of the alarm input.

Set PTZ linking parameters and click the OK buon to complete the sengs of the alarm input.

NOTE

Check whether the PTZ or speed dome supports PTZ linkage.

One alarm input can trigger presets, patrol or paern of more than one channel. But presets, patrols and paerns are exclusive.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking PTZ Linking [A1] Camera 01 Call Preset ● Preset 1 Call Patrol ● Patrol 1 Call Pattern ● Pattern 1 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 8-9 Set PTZ Linking of Alarm Input

Step 15 If you want to set handling acon of another alarm input, repeat the above steps or just copy the above sengs to it.

Copy Alarm Input to ✓Alarm Input No. Alarm Name 10.16.1.250:8000<-1 10.16.1.250:8000<-2 10.16.1.250:8000<-3 10.16.1.250:8000<-4 10.16.1.250:8000<-5 10.16.1.250:8000<-6 10.16.1.250:8000<-7 OK Cancel

Figure 8-10 Copy Sengs of Alarm Input

Step 16 (Oponal) Enable the one-key disarming for local alarm input 1 (Local<-1).

1) Check the checkbox of Enable One-Key Disarming.
2) Click the Sengs buon to enter the linkage acon setngs interface.
3) Select the alarm linkage acon (s) you want to disarm for the local alarm input 1. The selected linkage acons include the Full Screen Monitoring, Audible Warning, Nofy Surveillance Center, Send Email, Upload Captured Pictures to Cloud and Trigger Alarm Output.

Settings Linkage Action ✓ Full Screen Monitoring ■ Audible Warning ✓ Notify Surveillance Center ■ Send Email ■ Upload Captured Pictures To Cloud ■ Trigger Alarm Output Notice. The selected linkage action won't take effect for the whole device. Apply OK Cancel

Figure 8-11 Disarm Linkage Acons

NOTE

When the alarm input 1 (Local<-1) is enabled with one-key disarming, the other alarm input sengs are not congorable.

8.4 Detecting Video Loss

Purpose

Detect video loss of a channel and take alarm response acon(s).

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Video Loss.

Video Loss Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Video Loss Alarm Settings

Figure 8-12 Video Loss Setup Interface

Step 2 Select a Camera you want to detect.

Step 3 Set up handling method of video loss.

Check the checkbox of Enable Video Loss Alarm.

Click 📄uon to set up handling method of video loss.

Step 4 Set arming schedule of the channel.

Select Arming Schedule tab to set the channel's arming schedule.

Choose one day of a week and up to eight me periods can be set within each day. Or you can click the Copy buon to copy the me period sengs to other day(s).

NOTE

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Settings Arming Schedule Linkage Action Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 8-13 Set Arming Schedule of Video Loss

Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also use Copy buon to copy an arming schedule to other days.

Step 5 Select Linkage Action tab to set up alarm response acon of video loss (please refer to Chapter 8.8 Seng Alarm Response Acons).

Step 6 Click the OK buon to complete the video loss sengs of the channel.

Repeat the above steps to nish sengs of other channels, or click the Copy buon copy the above sengs to them.

8.5 Detecting Video Tampering

Purpose

Trigger alarm when the lens is covered and take alarm response acon(s).

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Video Tampering Detecon.

Video Tampering Detection Settings Camera [D1] IPdome Enable Video Tampering Detect... Settings Sensitivity

Figure 8-14 Video Tampering Interface

Step 2 Select a Camera you want to detect video tampering.

Step 3 Check the checkbox of Enable Video Tampering Detecon.

Step 4 Drag the sensitivity bar and choose a proper sensitivity level.

Step 5 Click 📋 set handling method of video tampering. Set arming schedule and alarm response acons of the channel.

1) Click Arming Schedule tab to set the arming schedule of response acon.
2) Select one day of a week and up to eight me periods can be set within each day.

i NOTE

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Settings Arming Schedule Linkage Action Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 8-15 Set Arming Schedule of Video Tampering

3) Select Linkage Action tab to set alarm response acons of video tampering alarm (please refer to Chapter 8.8 Seng Alarm Response Acons).

Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also use Copy buon to copy an arming schedule to other days.

4) Click the OK buon to complete the video tampering sengs of the channel.

Repeat the above steps to nish sengs of other channels, or click the Copy buon copy the above sengs to them.

Step 6 Click the Apply buon to save and acvate the seings.

8.6 Setting All-day Video Quality Diagnostics

Purpose

The device provides two ways to diagnose the video quality: manual and all-day. Perform the following steps to set the threshold of the diagnosing and the linkage acons.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Video Quality Diagnoscs.

Video Quality Diagnostics Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Video Quality Diagnostics Settings Diagnostics Mode Threshold Blurred Im... 60 °C Abnormal ... 55 °C Color Cast 60 °C

Figure 8-16 Video Quality Diagnoscs Interface

Step 2 Select a Camera you want to detect video tampering.

Step 3 Check the checkbox of Enable Video Quality Diagnoscs.

i NOTE

To enable video quality diagnoses, the funcon should be supported by the selected camera.

Step 4 Enable and set the threshold of the diagnostic types, there are Blurred Image, Abnormal Brightness, and Color Cast.

Check the corresponding checkbox of the diagnostic type, and adjust the threshold of it by dragging the bar.

NOTE

The higher the threshold you set, the harder the excepon will be detected.

Step 5 Click set handling method of video quality diagnoses. Set arming schedule and alarm response acons of the channel.

1) Click Arming Schedule tab to set the arming schedule of response acon.

2) Choose one day of a week and up to eight me periods can be set within each day.

NOTE

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Settings Armng Schedule Linkage Action Week Mon 1 10:00-16:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 *For getting an accurate feedback result, it is recommended to set the testing schedule in the daytime. Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 8-17 Set Arming Schedule of Video Quality Diagnoscs

3) Select Linkage Action tab to set alarm response acons of video quality diagnoses alarm (please refer to Chapter 8.8 Setng Alarm Response Acons).

Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also use Copy buon to copy an arming schedule to other days.

4) Click the OK buon to complete the video quality diagnoses sengs of the channel.

Step 6 Click the Apply buon to save and acvate sengs.

Step 7 (Oponal) you can copy the same sengs to other cameras by clicking the Copy buon.

8.7 Handling Exceptions

Purpose

Excepon sengs refer to the handling method of various excepons, e.g.

● HDD Full: The HDD is full.

- HDD Error: Wring HDD error, unformaed HDD, etc.

● Network Disconnected: Disconnected network cable.

● IP Conicted: Duplicated IP address.

- Illegal Login: Incorrect user ID or password.

• Input/Recording Resolution Mismatch: The input resoluon is smaller than the recording resoluon.
• Record/Capture Exception: No space for saving recorded les or captured pictures.
• PoC Module Exception: The DVR cannot detect the PoC module or the PoC module is powered o abnormally.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Excepons.

Exception Enable Event Hint Event Hint Settings Exception Type HDD Full Audible Warning Notify Surveillance Center Send Email Trigger Alarm Output

Figure 8-18 Excepon Sengs Interface

Step 2 Check the checkbox of Enable Event Hint to display the ▲ (Event/Excepon icon) when an excepconal event occurs. And click the icon to select the detailed event hint for display.

Event Hint Settings All HDD Full HDD Error Network Disconnected IP Conflicted Illegal Login Inputrecording resolution mismatch Video Signal Less Alarm Input Triggered Video Tanner Detected OK Cancel

Figure 8-19 Event Hint Sengs

i NOTE

Click the icon 📄 appears in the live view interface, and you can view the detailed informaon of the excepconal event. Click the button Set, and then you can select the detailed event hint for display.

Alarm/Exception Information Alarm/Exception Information(Camera No., Alarm Input No., H... Motion Detection D1 10.16.1.250 Set Exit

Figure 8-20 Detailed Event

Step 3 Set the alarm linkage acons. For details, see Chapter 8.8 Seng Alarm Response Acons.

Step 4 Click Apply to save the sengs.

8.8 Setting Alarm Response Actions

Purpose

Alarm response acons will be acvated when an alarm or excepon occurs, including Full Screen Monitoring, Audible Warning (buzzer), Nofy Surveillance Center, Send Email and Trigger Alarm Output.

Full Screen Monitoring

When an alarm is triggered, the local monitor (HDMI, VGA or CVBS monitor) displays in full screen the video image from the alarming channel congured for full screen monitoring.

If alarms are triggered simultaneously in several channels, their full-screen images will be switched at an interval of 10 seconds (default dwell me). A dierent dwell me can be set by going to Menu > Conguraon > Live View.

Auto-switch will terminate once the alarm stops and you will be taken back to the Live View interface.

Audible Warning

Trigger an audible beep when an alarm is detected.

Nofy Surveillance Center

Sends an exception or alarm signal to remote alarm host when an event occurs. The alarm host refers to the PC installed with Remote Client.

NOTE

The alarm signal will be transmied automacally at detecon mode when remote alarm host is congured. Please refer to Chapter 12.2.6 Conguring More Sengs for details of alarm host conguraon.

Send Email

Send an email with alarm informaon to a user or users when an alarm is detected.

Please refer to Chapter 12.2.8 Conguring Email for details of Email conguraon.

Trigger Alarm Output

Trigger an alarm output when an alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Alarm > Alarm Output.

Step 2 Select an alarm output and set alarm name and dwell me.

Alarm Status Alarm Input Alarm Output Alarm Output No. 10.16.1.250:8000->1 Alarm Name Dwell Time 5s Settings

Figure 8-21 Alarm Output Sengs Interface

NOTE

If Manually Clear is selected in the drop-down list of Dwell Time, you can clear it only by going to Menu > Manual > Alarm.

Step 3 Click ☐ on to set the arming schedule of alarm output.

Choose one day of a week and up to 8 me periods can be set within each day.

NOTE

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Settings Arming Schedule Week Mon 1 00:00-24:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 8-22 Set Arming Schedule of Alarm Output

Step 4 Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also click Copy buon to copy an arming schedule to other days.

Click the OK buon to complete the arming schedule seng of alarm output.

Step 5 Click the Apply buon to save the sengs.

Chapter 9 POS Configuration

NOTE

This chapter is only applicable to DS-7300HQHI-K4 and DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR.

9.1 Configuring POS Settings

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > POS > POS Sengs.

Step 2 Select the POS from the drop-down list. Up to 8 POS units are selectable.

Step 3 Check the checkbox to enable the POS funcon.

POS Settings Overlay Channel Select POS POS 1 Enable Settings Privacy Settings POS Protocol Universal Protocol Advanced Connection Type TCP Connection Set Character Encoding Latin-1(Iso-8659-1) Overlay Mode Page Font Size Small Overlay Time (s) 5 Delay Time(s) 5 POS Overlay in Live V... Font Color Copy Apply Back

Figure 9-1 POS Sengs

Step 4 Filter the POS privacy informaon if needed.

1) Click 📍 after Privacy Sengs to enter POS Privacy Informaon Filtering interface.

POS Privacy Information Filtering Privacy Information1 Privacy Information2 Privacy Information3 OK Cancel

Figure 9-2 POS Privacy Informaon Filtering

2) Edit the Privacy Informaon in the text led to hide the input informaon overlay. Up to 3 pieces of privacy informaon can be edited and no more than 32 characters can be input for each piece of informaon.
3) Click OK to save the setngs.

Step 5 Select the POS protocol to Universal Protocol, EPSON, AVE or NUCLEUS.

● Universal Protocol

Click the Advanced buon to expand more seings when selecng the universal protocol. You can set the start line tag, line break tag and end line tag for the POS overlay characters, and the case-sensitive property of the characters.

POS Protocol Universal Protocol Connection Type TCP Connection Start Line Tag a1 Line Break Tag 0D0A End Line Tag c1 Case-sensitive ✓ General Set Hex ✓ Hex ✓ Hex ✓ No Tag ✓

Figure 9-3 Universal Protocol Sengs

- NUCLEUS

If you select NUCLEUS protocol, reboot the device to take the new sengs into eect.

POS Protocol NUCLEUS Set Connection Type RS-232 Set

Figure 9-4 NUCLEUS Protocol Sengs

1) Click Set buon to enter the NUCLEUS Sengs interface.

NUCLEUS Settings e s t OK Cancel

Figure 9-5 NUCLEUS Sengs

2) Edit the Employee, Shi and Terminal informaon. No more than 32 characters can be input.
3) Click OK to save the setngs.

• If you select NUCLEUS protocol, the conncon type defaults to be RS-232, and all the other POS protocol will change to be NUCLEUS.
• You should set Usage to be Transparent Channel for RS-232 sengs in Menu > Conguraon > RS-232 rst.

Step 6 Select the Connecon Type to TCP, UDP, Mulcast, RS-232, USB->RS-232 or Sni, and click Set to congregate the parameters for each connecon type.

- TCP Connecon

When using TCP conncon, the port must be set from 0 to 65535, and the port for each POS machine must be unique. Input the Allowed Remote IP Address for connecng the DVR and the POS machine via TCP.

TCP Connection Settings Port 10010 Allowed Remote IP Address 192.0 .0 .64

Figure 9-6 TCP Connecon Sengs

- UDP Connecon

When using UDP conncon, the port must be set from 0 to 65535, and the port for each POS machine must be unique. Input the Allowed Remote IP Address for connecng the DVR and the POS machine via UDP.

UDP Connection Settings Port 10100 Allowed Remote IP Address 192.0 .0 .64

Figure 9-7 UDP Connecon Sengs

- USB->RS-232 Connecon

Congure the port parameters of USB-to-RS-232 convertor, including the serial number of port, baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity and ow ctrl.

When using USB->RS-232 convertor mode, the port of USB-to-RS-232 convertor and the POS must be corresponding to each other, e.g., POS1 must be connected to port1 of the convertor.

USB->RS-232 Settings Serial Number 1 Baud Rate 2400 Data Bit 5 Stop Bit 1 Parity None Flow Ctrl None OK Cancel

Figure 9-8 USB-to-RS-232 Sengs

- RS-232 Connecon

Connect the DVR and the POS machine via RS-232. The RS-232 sengs can be congured in Menu>Conguraon>RS-232. The Usage must be set to Transparent Channel.

RS-232 Settings Baud Rate 115200 Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 Parity None Flow Ctrl None Usage Transparent Channel

Figure 9-9 RS-232 Sengs

- Mulcast Connecon

When connecng the DVR and the POS machine via Mulcast protocol, set the mulcast address and port.

Multicast Settings Address 224 .0 .0 .1 Port 10400

Figure 9-10 Mulcast Sengs

- Sni Connecon

Connect the DVR and the POS machine via Sni. Congure the source address and desnaon address sengs.

Sniff Settings Enable Source Port... Source Address 192 .168 .1 .1 Source Port 10200 Enable Destination ... Enable Destination ... Destination Address 192 .168 .0 .1 Destination Port 10300 OK Cancel

Figure 9-11 Sni Sengs

Step 7 Set other parameters of characters overly.

4) Select the character encoding format from the drop-down list.
5) Select the overlay mode of the characters to display in scrolling or page mode.
6) Select the font size to small, medium or large.
7) Set the overlay me of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
8) Set the delay me of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
9) (Oponal) Check the checkbox to enable the POS Overlay in Live View.
10) Select the font color for the characters.

Character Encoding Latin-1(iso-8859-1) Overlay Mode Page Font Size Small Overlay Time (s) 5 Delay Time(s) 5 POS Overlay in Live V... ✓ Font Color

Figure 9-12 Overlay Character Sengs

You can adjust the size and position of textbox on the live view screen of POS sengs interface by dragging the frame.

Step 8 Click Apply to acvate the setngs.

Step 9 (Oponal) You can click the Copy buon to copy the current sengs to other POS (s).

Copy to All POS1 POS2 POS3 POS4 POS5 POS6 POS7 POS8 OK Cancel

Figure 9-13 Copy POS Sengs

9.2 Configuring Overlay Channel

Purpose

You can assign the POS machine to corresponding channel on which you want to overlay.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > POS > Overlay Channel.

Step 2 Click to select an analog or IP camera from the camera list on the right, and then click a POS item from the POS list you want to overlay on the selected camera.

Click for to go to the previous or next page of cameras.

POS Settings Overlay Channel POS POS1 POS2 POS3 POS4 POS5 POS6 POS7 POS8 D1 D2 D3 D4 X POS1 X X X D5 D6 D7 D8 X X X X D9 D10 D11 D12 X X X X D13 D14 D15 D16 X X X X < | | | > P: 2/3 Apply Back

Figure 9-14 Overlay Channel Sengs

Step 3 You can also click 📄 to overlay all POS items to the rst 8 channels in order. And the is used to clear all POS overlay sengs.

Step 4 Click the Apply buon to save the sengs.

9.3 Configuring POS Alarm

Purpose

Set the POS alarm parameters to trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen monitoring, audio warning, nofying the surveillance center, sending email and so on.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > POS > POS Sengs.

Step 2 Follow the steps in Chapter 9.1-9.2 to congregate the POS sengs.

Step 3 Click ☐ enter the alarm sengs interface.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 IP Camera D1 D2 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 9-15 Set Trigger Cameras of POS

Step 4 Click Trigger Channel tab and select one or more channels to record or become full-screen monitoring when POS alarm is triggered.

Step 5 Set arming schedule of the channel.

Select Arming Schedule tab to set the channel's arming schedule.

Choose one day of a week and up to eight me periods can be set within each day. Or you can click the Copy buon to copy the me period sengs to other day(s).

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking Week Mon 1 00:00-18:00 2 00:00-00:00 3 00:00-00:00 4 00:00-00:00 5 00:00-00:00 6 00:00-00:00 7 00:00-00:00 8 00:00-00:00 Copy Apply OK Cancel

Figure 9-16 Set Arming Schedule

Step 6 Click the Handling tab to set up alarm response acons of POS alarm (Refer to Chapter 8.8 Seng Alarm Response Acons).

Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule of other days of a week.

Click the OK buon to complete the POS sengs of the channel.

Step 7 Select PTZ Linking tab and set PTZ linkage of the POS alarm.

Set PTZ linking parameters and click the OK buon to complete the sengs of the alarm input.

Please check whether the PTZ or speed dome supports PTZ linkage.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Handling PTZ Linking PTZ Linking [A1] Camera 01 Call Preset Preset 1 Call Patrol Patrol 1 Call Pattern Pattern 1 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 9-17 Set PTZ Linking

Step 8 Click OK to save the sengs.

Chapter 10 VCA Alarm

Purpose

The DVR can receive the VCA alarm (line crossing detecon, intrusion detecon, sudden scene change detecon and audio excepon detecon) sent by analog camera, and the VCA detecon must be enabled and congured on the camera sengs interface rst. All other VCA detecon features must be supported by the connected IP camera.

NOTE

• HTHI series DVR support full-channel line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon. Channels with audio support audio excepon detecon.
• For HUHI series DVR, if enhanced VCA mode is enabled, full-channel line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon are supported, but 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input are not supported; if enhanced VCA mode is disabled, 2-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon are supported, and 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input are also supported.
• DS-7200HQHI series support up to 4-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon if enhanced VCA mode is enabled. DS-7216HQHI series also support 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. Channels with audio support audio excepon detecon.
• DS-7300HQHI-K series support up to 4-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon if enhanced VCA mode is enabled, and 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. Channels with audio support audio excepon detecon.
• For the analog channels, the line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon conict with other VCA detecon such as sudden scene change detecon, face detecon and vehicle detecon. You can only enable one funcon.

10.1 Face Detection

Purpose

Face detecon funcon detects the face appears in the surveillance scene, and some certain acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

Step 2 Select the camera to congregate the VCA.

You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detecon.

VCA Camera [D2] Camera 01 Save VCA PI... Face Det... Vehicle ... Line Cro... Intrusion ... Region ... Region ... Littering ... People G... Fast Mo... Parking ... Unattend... Object R... Audio Ex... Defocus ... Sudden ... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Rule 1 Rule Settings 12-16-2014 Tue 15:2000 Draw Line Draw Cue... Clear All Apply Back

Figure 10-1 Face Detecon

Step 3 Select the VCA detecon type to Face Detecon.

Step 4 Click enter the face detecon sengs interface. Congure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage acon and PTZ linking for the face detecon alarm. Please refer to step 3 to step 5 of Chapter 8.2 Seng Sensor Alarms for detailed instrucons.

Settings Trigger Channel Arming Schedule Linkage Action PTZ Linking PTZ Linking [A1] Camera 01 Call Preset Preset 1 Call Patrol Patrol 1 Call Pattern Pattern 1 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 10-2 PTZ Linking

Step 5 Click the Rule Sengs buon to set the face detecon rules. You can drag the slider to set the detecon sensitivity.

Sensitivity: Range [1-5]. The higher the value is, the more easily the face can be detected.

Rule Settings No 1 Sensitivity 3

Figure 10-3 Set Face Detecon Sensitivity

Step 6 Click Apply to acvate the setngs.

10.2 Vehicle Detection

Purpose

Vehicle Detecon is available for the road trac monitoring. In Vehicle Detecon, the passed vehicle can be detected and the picture of its license plate can be captured. You can send alarm signal to nofy the surveillance center and upload the captured picture to FTP server.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

Step 2 Select the camera to congregate the VCA.

You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detecon.

Step 3 Select the VCA detecon type to Vehicle Detecon.

Step 4 Check the Enable checkbox to enable this funcon.

VCA Camera [D2] Camera 01 Face Det... Vehicle ... Line Cro... Intrusion ... Region ... Region ... Loitering ... People G... Fast Mo... Parking ... Unattend... Object R... Audio Ex... Defocus ... Sudden ... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Blacklist Whitelist Others Rule 1 03-26-2015 The 19:19:30 Draw Line Blacklist & Whit... Import/Export Draw Qua... No. Plate No. Type Clear All #0# #1 #1# Camera 01 Apply Back

Figure 10-4 Set Vehicle Detecon

Step 5 Click to congregate the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage acon and PTZ linking.

The PTZ linking is only applicable to other list, not to whitelist and blacklist.

Step 6 Click the Rule Seings to enter the rule sengs interface. Congure the lane, upload picture and overlay content sengs. Up to 4 lanes are selectable.

Rule Settings Basic Picture Overlay Content No. 1 Scene No Vehicle Detection Scene 1 Scene Name Lane Number 1 Apply OK Cancel

Figure 10-5 Rule Sengs

Step 7 Click Save to save the sengs.

i NOTE

Refer to the User Manual of Network Camera for the detailed instrucons for the vehicle detecon.

10.3 Line Crossing Detection

Purpose

This funcon can be used for detectng people, vehicles and objects cross a set virtual line. The line crossing direcon can be set as bidireconal, from le to right or from right to le. And you can set the duraon for the alarm response acons, such as full screen monitoring, audible warning, etc.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

Step 2 Select the camera to congregate the VCA.

You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detecon.

Step 3 Select the VCA detecon type to Line Crossing Detecon.

Step 4 Check the Enable checkbox to enable this funcon.

Step 5 Click ☐ to congregate the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage acon and PTZ linking for the line crossing detecon alarm.

Step 6 Click the Rule Sengs buon to set the line crossing detecon rules.

1) Select the direcon to A<->B, A->B or B->A.

A<->B: Only the arrow on the B side shows. When an object goes across the congured line, both direcons can be detected and alarms are triggered.

A->B: Only the object crossing the congured line from the A side to the B side can be detected.

B->A: Only the object crossing the congured line from the B side to the A side can be detected.

2) Drag the slider to set the detecon sensitivity.

Sensitivity: Range [1-100]. The higher the value is, the more easily the detecon alarm can be triggered.

3) Click OK to save the rule sengs and return to the line crossing detecon sengs interface.

Rule Settings No. 1 Direction A<->B Sensitivity 50

Figure 10-6 Set Line Crossing Detecon Rules

Step 7 Click and set two points in the preview window to draw a virtual line.

You can use the 📄 to clear the exisng virtual line and re-draw it.

NOTE

Up to 4 rules can be congured.

VCA Camera [D1] IPdome Save VCA PI... Face Del... Vehicle ... Line Cro... Intrusion ... Region ... Region ... Loitering ... People G... Fast Mo... Parking ... Unattend... Object R... Audio Ex... Defocus ... Sudden ... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Rule 1 Rule Settings 04-03-2015 Fri 10:50:53 Draw Line Draw Qua... Clear All Apply Back

Figure 10-7 Draw Line for Line Crossing Detecon

Step 8 Click Apply to acvate the setngs.

NOTE

The sudden scene change detecon and the line crossing detecon cannot be enabled at the same channel.

10.4 Intrusion Detection

Purpose

Intrusion detecon funcon detects people, vehicle or other objects which enter and loiter in a pre-dened virtual region, and some certain acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

Step 2 Select the camera to congregate the VCA.

You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detecon.

Step 3 Select the VCA detecon type to Intrusion Detecon.

Step 4 Check the Enable checkbox to enable this funcon.

Step 5 Click 🙏 to congregate the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage acon and PTZ linking for the intrusion detecon alarm.

Step 6 Click the Rule Sengs buon to set the intrusion detecon rules. Set the following parameters.

1) Threshold: Range [1s-10s], the threshold for the me of the object loitering in the region. When the duraon of the object in the dened detecon area is longer than the set me, the alarm will be triggered.

2) Drag the slider to set the detecon sensitivity.

Sensitivity: Range [1-100]. The value of the sensitivity denotes the size of the object which can trigger the alarm. The higher the value is, the more easily the detecon alarm can be triggered.

3) Percentage: Range [1-100]. Percentage denotes the rao of the in-region part of the object which can trigger the alarm. For example, if the percentage is set as 50%, when the object enters the region and occupies half of the whole region, the alarm is triggered.

Rule Settings No. 1 Time Threshold (s) 5 0 Sensitivity 50 0 Percentage 0 0

Figure 10-8 Set Intrusion Crossing Detecon Rules

4) Click OK to save the rule sengs and back to the line crossing detecon setngs interface.

Step 7 Click 📄 and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detecon region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be congured.

You can use the _x clear the exisng virtual line and re-draw it.

NOTE

Up to 4 rules can be congured.

VCA Camera [D1] IPdome Save VCA Pi... Face Del... Vehicle ... Line Cro... Intrusion ... Region ... Region ... Loitering... People G... Fast Mo... Parking ... Unattend... Object R... Audio Ex... Defocus ... Sudden ... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Rule 1 Rule Settings 01-15-2015 T## 00:01:14 Draw Line Draw Oua... Clear All Apply Back

Figure 10-9 Draw Area for Intrusion Detecon

Step 8 Click Apply to save the sengs.

NOTE

The sudden scene change detecon and the intrusion detecon cannot be enabled at the same channel.

10.5 Region Entrance Detection

Purpose

Region entrance detecon funcon detects people, vehicle or other objects which enter a pre-dened virtual region from the outside place, and some certain acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

Step 2 Select the camera to congregate the VCA.

You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detecon.

Step 3 Select the VCA detecon type to Region Entrance Detecon.

Step 4 Check the Enable checkbox to enable this funcon.

Step 5 Click 🙏 to congregate the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage acon and PTZ linking for the region entrance detecon alarm.

Step 6 Click the Rule Sengs buon to set the sensitivity of the region entrance detecon.

Sensitivity: Range [0-100]. The higher the value is, the more easily the detecon alarm can be triggered.

Step 7 Click 📋d draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detecon region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be congured.

You can use the Ⓞ clear the exisng virtual line and re-draw it.

VCA Camera [D1] IPdome Face Det... Vehicle ... Line Cro... Intrusion ... Region ... Region ... Loitering... People G... Fast Mo... Parking ... Unattend... Object R... Audio Ex... Defocus ... Sudden ... PIR Alarm Enable Settings Rule 1 Rule Settings 01-15-2015 1:00:04:26 Draw Line Draw Qua... Clear All Apply Back

Figure 10-10 Set Region Entrance Detecon

Up to 4 rules can be congured.

Step 8 Click Apply to save the sengs.

10.6 Region Exiting Detection

Purpose

Region exing detecon funcon detects people, vehicle or other objects which exit from a pre-dened virtual region, and some certain acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE

• Please refer to the Chapter 9.5 Region Entrance Detecon for operang steps to congregate the region exing detecon.
• Up to 4 rules can be congured.

10.7 Loitering Detection

Purpose

Loitering detecon funcon detects people, vehicle or other objects which loiter in a pre-dened virtual region for some certain me, and a series of acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE

• Please refer to the Chapter 9.4 Intrusion Detecon for operang steps to conjure the loitering detecon.
• The Threshold [1s-10s] in the Rule Sengs denies the me of the object loitering in the region. If you set the value as 5, alarm is triggered aer the object loitering in the region for 5s; and if you set the value as 0, alarm is triggered immediately aer the object entering the region.
• Up to 4 rules can be congured.

10.8 People Gathering Detection

Purpose

People gathering detecon alarm is triggered when people gather around in a pre-dened virtual region, and a series of acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE

- Please refer to the Chapter 9.4 Intrusion Detecon for operang steps to conjure the people gathering detecon.

• The Percentage in the Rule Setngs denies the gathering density of the people in the region. Usually, when the percentage is small, the alarm can be triggered when small number of people gathered in the dened detecon region.
• Up to 4 rules can be congured.

10.9 Fast Moving Detection

Purpose

Fast moving detecon alarm is triggered when people, vehicle or other objects move fast in a pre-dened virtual region, and a series of acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE

• Please refer to the Chapter 9.4 Intrusion Detecon for operang steps to conjure the fast moving detecon.
• The Sensitivity in the Rule Setngs denes the moving speed of the object which can trigger the alarm. The higher the value is, the more easily a moving object can trigger the alarm.
• Up to 4 rules can be congured.

10.10 Parking Detection

Purpose

Parking detecon funcon detects illegal parking in places such as highway, one-way street, etc., and a series of acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE

• Please refer to the Chapter 9.4 Intrusion Detecon for operang steps to conjure the parking detecon.
• The Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Sengs denies the me of the vehicle parking in the region. If you set the value as 10, alarm is triggered aer the vehicle stay in the region for 10s.
• Up to 4 rules can be congured.

10.11 Unattended Baggage Detection

Purpose

Unaended baggage detecon funcon detects the objects le over in the pre-dened region such as the baggage, purse, dangerous materials, etc., and a series of acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE

• Please refer to the Chapter 9.4 Intrusion Detecon for operang steps to conjure the unaended baggage detecon.
• The Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Sengs denes the me of the objects le over in the region. If you set the value as 10, alarm is triggered aer the object is le and stay in the region for 10s. And the Sensitivity denes the similarity degree of the background image. Usually, when the sensitivity is high, a very small object le in the region can trigger the alarm.
• Up to 4 rules can be congured.

10.12 Object Removal Detection

Purpose

Object removal detecon funcon detects the objects removed from the pre-dened region, such as the exhibits on display, and a series of acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE

• Please refer to the Chapter 9.4 Intrusion Detecon for operang steps to conjure the object removal detecon.
• The Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Sengs denes the me of the objects removed from the region. If you set the value as 10, alarm is triggered aer the object disappears from the region for 10s. And the Sensitivity denes the similarity degree of the background image. Usually, when the sensitivity is high, a very small object taken from the region can trigger the alarm.
  ● Up to 4 rules can be congured.

10.13 Audio Exception Detection

Purpose

Audio excepon detecon funcon detects the abnormal sounds in the surveillance scene, such as the sudden increase/decrease of the sound intensity, and some certain acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

NOTE

The audio excepon detecon is supported by all analog channels.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

Step 2 Select the camera to congregate the VCA.

You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detecon.

Step 3 Select the VCA detecon type to Audio Excepon Detecon.

Step 4 Click ☐ to congregate the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage acon and PTZ linking for the audio excepon alarm.

Step 5 Click the Rule Sengs buon to set the audio excepon rules.

Rule Settings No. 1 Audio Loss Exception Sudden Increase of Sound Intensity... Sensitivity 50 Sound Intensity Threshold 50 Sudden Decrease of Sound Intensit... Sensitivity 50 OK Cancel

Figure 10-11 Set Audio Excepon Detecon Rules

1) Check the checkbox of Audio Loss Excepon to enable the audio loss detecon funcon.

2) Check the checkbox of Sudden Increase of Sound Intensity Detecon to detect the sound steep rise in the surveillance scene. You can set the detecon sensitivity and threshold for sound steep rise.

Sensitivity: Range [1-100], the smaller the value is, the more severe the change should be to trigger the detecon.

Sound Intensity Threshold: Range [1-100], it can iter the sound in the environment, the louder the environment sound, the higher the value should be. You can adjust it according to the real environment.

3) Check the checkbox of Sudden Decrease of Sound Intensity Detecon to detect the sound steep drop in the surveillance scene. You can set the detecon sensitivity [1-100] for sound steep drop.

Step 6 Click Apply to acvate the sengs.

10.14 Defocus Detection

Purpose

The image blur caused by defocus of the lens can be detected, and some certain acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

• Please refer to the Chapter 9.1 Face Detecon for operang steps to conjure the defocus detecon.
• The Sensitivity in the Rule Sengs ranges from 1 to 100, and the higher the value is, the more easily the defocus image can trigger the alarm.

10.15 Sudden Scene Change

Purpose

Scene change detecon funcon detects the change of surveillance environment aected by the external factors; such as the intenonal rotaon of the camera and some certain acons can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

• Please refer to the Chapter 9.1 Face Detecon for operang steps to congure the scene change detecon.
• The Sensitivity in the Rule Sengs ranges from 1 to 100, and the higher the value is, the more easily the change of scene can trigger the alarm.
• For the analog cameras, the line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon conict with other VCA detecon such as sudden scene change detecon, face detecon and vehicle detecon. You can only enable one funcon. If you have enabled line crossing detecon or intrusion detecon, when you enable sudden scene change detecon and apply the sengs, the following aenon box pops up to remind you there is no enough resource and ask you to disable the enabled VCA type(s) of the selected channel(s).

Attention No enough resource. Please disable the following function(s) in "VCA" settings menu: 1.A1 Line Crossing Detection or Intrusion Detection. OK

Figure 10-12 Disable Other VCA Type(s)

10.16 PIR Alarm

Purpose

A PIR (Passive Infrared) alarm is triggered when an intruder moves within the detector's eld of view. The heat energy dissipated by a person, or any other warm blooded creature such as dogs, cats, etc., can be detected.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > VCA.

Step 2 Select the camera to congregate the VCA.

You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detecon.

Step 3 Select the VCA detecon type to PIR Alarm.

Step 4 Click 📋 to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage acon and PTZ linking for the PIR alarm.

Step 5 Click the Rule Sengs buon to set the rules. Please refer to the Chapter 9.1 Face Detecon for instrucons.

Step 6 Click Apply to acvate the sengs.

Chapter 11 VCA Search

With the congured VCA detecon, the device supports the VCA search for the behavior search, face search, plate search, people counng and heat map results of the IP cameras.

11.1 Face Search

Purpose

When there are detected face picture captured and saved in HDD, you can enter the Face Search interface to search the picture and play the picture related video les according to the specied condions.

Before you start

Please refer to Chapter 10.1 Face Detecon for conguring the face detecon.

Step 1 Go to Menu > VCA Search > Face Search.

Step 2 Select the camera (s) for the face search.

Face Search IP Camera D1 D2 Start Time 01-07-2015 00:00:00 End Time 18-07-2015 23:59:59 Search Back

Figure 11-1 Face Search

Step 3 Specify the start me and end me for searching the captured face pictures or video les.

Step 4 Upload the pictures from your local storage device for matching the detected face pictures.

Step 5 Set the similarity level for the source pictures and the captured pictures.

Step 6 Click Search to start searching. The search results of face detecon pictures are displayed in list or in chart.

Face Search Chart List Cam... Start Time Similarity Play D1 12-08-2014 20:33:17 D1 12-10-2014 11:18:11 D1 12-10-2014 11:18:11 Total: 3 P: 1/1 Picture Record Export All Export Back

Figure 11-2 Face Search Interface

Step 7 Play the face picture related video le.

You can double click on a face picture to play its related video le in the view window on the top right, or select a picture item and click 📄 to play it.

You can also click □ stop the playing, or click / □ play the previous/next le.

Step 8 If you want to export the captured face pictures to local storage device, connect the storage device to the device and click Export All to enter the Export interface.

Click Export to export all face pictures to the storage device.

Please refer to Chapter 7 Backup for the operaon of exporng les.

Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 *.mp4;*.zip Refresh SaveType MP4 Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play Final Data Folder 01-12-2013 09:29:56 ch01_2015071600... 992.56MB File 16-07-2015 14:12:16 ch02_2015071613... 76.55MB File 16-07-2015 14:13:22 Free Space 6357.23MB New Folder Format Export Back

Figure 11-3 Export Files

11.2 Behavior Search

Purpose

The behavior analysis detects a series of suspicious behavior based on VCA detecon, and certain linkage methods will be enabled if the alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Go to Menu > VCA Search > Behavior Search.

Step 2 Select the camera (s) for the behavior search.

Step 3 Specify the start me and end me for searching the matched pictures.

Behavior Search IP Camera D1 D2 Start Time 01-07-2015 00:00:00 End Time 18-07-2015 23:59:59 Type All Search Back

Figure 11-4 Behavior Search Interface

Step 4 Select the VCA detecon type from the drop-down list, including the line crossing detecon, intrusion detecon, unaended baggage detecon, object removal detecon, region entrance detecon, region exing detecon, parking detecon, loitering detecon, people gathering detecon and fast moving detecon.

Step 5 Click Search to start searching. The search results of pictures are displayed in list or in chart.

Behavior Search Chart List Cam... Start Time Behavior Type Play D3 12-12-2014 12:32:36 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 15:10:44 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 15:11:21 Intrusion Detection D3 12-12-2014 16:55:30 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 16:59:15 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 17:05:05 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 17:09:54 Region Exiting Detection D3 12-12-2014 17:14:40 Region Exiting Detection Total: 8 P: 1/1 ✓ Picture ✓ Record Export All Export Back

Figure 11-5 Behavior Search Results

Step 6 Play the behavior analysis picture related video le.

You can double click on a picture from the list to play its related video le in the view window on the top right, or select a picture item and click 📷 to play it.

You can also click □ stop the playing, or click / □ to play, the previous/next le.

Step 7 If you want to export the captured pictures to local storage device, connect the storage device to the device and click Export All to enter the Export interface.

Click Export to export all pictures to the storage device.

11.3 Plate Search

Purpose

You can search and view the matched captured vehicle plate picture and related informaon according to the plate searching conditions including the start me/end me, country and plate No.

Step 1 Go to Menu > VCA Search > Plate Search.

Step 2 Select the camera (s) for the plate search.

Step 3 Specify the start me and end me for searching the matched plate pictures.

Plate Search IP Camera D1 D2 Start Time 01-07-2015 00:00:00 End Time 18-07-2015 23:59:59 Country All Plate No. Search Back

Figure 11-6 Plate Search

Step 4 Select the country from the drop-down list for searching the locaon of the vehicle plate.

Step 5 Input the plate No. in the eld for search.

Step 6 Click Search to start searching. The search results of detected vehicle plate pictures are displayed in list or in chart.

i NOTE

Please refer to the Step 7 to Step 8 of Chapter 10.1 Face Search for the operaon of the search results.

11.4 People Counting

Purpose

The People Counng is used to calculate the number of people entered or le a certain congured area and form in daily/weekly/monthly/annual reports for analysis.

Step 1 Go to Menu > VCA Search > People Counng.

Step 2 Select the camera for the people counng.

Step 3 Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report or Annual Report.

Step 4 Set the stascs me.

Step 5 Click the Counng buon to start people counng stascs.

Figure 11-7 People Counng Interface

Step 6 You can click the Export buon to export the statiscs report in excel format.

11.5 Heat Map

Purpose

Heat map is a graphical representaon of data represented by colors. The heat map funcon is usually used to analyze the visit mes and dwell me of customers in a congured area.

Step 1 Go to Menu > VCA Search > Heat Map.

Step 2 Select the camera for the heat map processing.

Step 3 Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report or Annual Report.

Step 4 Set the stascs me.

Heat Map Camera [D1] IPdome Report Type Daily Report Statistics Time 09-12-2016 Counting Export Back

Figure 11-8 Heat Map Interface

Step 5 Click the Counng buon to export the report data and start heat map stascs, and the results are displayed in graphics marked in dierent colors.

NOTE

As shown in Figure 10-8, red color block (255, 0, 0) indicates the most welcome area, and blue color block (0, 0, 255) indicates the less-popular area.

Step 6 You can click the Export buon to export the statiscs report in excel format.

Chapter 12 Network Settings

12.1 Configuring General Settings

Purpose

Network sengs must be properly congured before you operate DVR over network.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Network > General.

NIC Type Enable DHCP IPv4 Address 10 .16 .5 .102 IPv4 Subnet ... 255 .255 .255 .0 IPv4 Default G... 10 .16 .5 .254 Mac Address MTU(Bytes) Enable DNS DHCP Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server LAN1 IPv6 Address 1 fe80:2a57:beff feeb:6a7f/64 IPv6 Address 2 IPv6 Default G... 28:57:be:eb:6a:7f 1500

Figure 12-1 Network Sengs Interface

Step 2 On the General Setngs interface, you can congregate the following parameters: Working Mode (applicable for DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series), NIC Type, IPv4 Address, IPv4 Gateway, MTU, DNS Server and Main NIC.

Working Mode

There are two 10M/100M/1000M NIC cards provided by DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR, and it allows the device to work in Mul-address and Net-fault Tolerance.

• Mul-address Mode: The parameters of the two NIC cards can be congured independently. You can select LAN1 or LAN2 in the NIC type eld for parameter sengs.
  You can select one NIC card as default route. And then the system is connecng with the extranet and the data will be forwarded through the default route.
• Net-fault Tolerance Mode: The two NIC cards use the same IP address, and you can select the Main NIC to LAN1 or LAN2. By this way, in case of one NIC card failure, the device will automatically enable the other standby NIC card so as to ensure the normal running of the whole system.

NOTE

● The valid value of MTU is from 500 to 1500.
- If the DHCP server is available, you can check the checkbox of Enable DHCP to automatically obtain an IP address and other network sengs from that server.

- If DHCP is enabled, you can check the checkbox of Enable DNS DHCP or uncheck it and edit the Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server.

Step 3 Aer having congured the general sengs, click the Apply buon to save the sengs.

12.2 Configuring Advanced Settings

12.2.1 Configuring PPPoE Settings

Purpose

The DVR also allows access by Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE).

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Network > PPPoE.

Enable PPPoE User Name Password

Figure 12-2 PPPoE Sengs Interface

Step 2 Check the Enable PPPoE checkbox to enable this feature.

Step 3 Enter User Name and Password for PPPoE access.

NOTE

The User Name and Password should be assigned by your ISP.

Step 4 Click the Apply buon to save the seings.

Step 5 Aer successful sengs, the system asks you to reboot the device to enable the new sengs, and the PPPoE dial-up is automatically connected aer reboot.

You can go to Menu > Maintenance > System Info > Network interface to view the status of PPPoE conncon.

12.2.2 Configuring Hik-Connect

Purpose

Hik-Connect provides the mobile phone applicaon and the service plaorm page (www.hik-connect.com) to access and manage your connected DVR, which enables you to get a convenient remote access to the surveillance system.

The Hik-Connect can be enabled via operaon on SADP soware, GUI and Web browser. We introduce the operaon steps on GUI in this secon.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Network > Plaorm Access.

Enable Access Type Hik-Connect Server Address dev.hik-connect.com Custom Enable Stream Encryption Verification Code Status Offline

Figure 12-3 Hik-Connect Sengs

Step 2 Check the Enable checkbox to acvate the funcon.

Then the Service Terms interface pops up as below.

Service Terms Verification Code To enable Hit-Connect service, you need to create a verification code or edit the default verification code. ■ The Hit-Connect service will require internet access. Please read Service Terms and Privacy Statement before enabling the service. Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to obtain Terms of Service and Privacy Statement. OK Cancel

Figure 12-4 Service Terms

1) Create the verificaon code and enter the code in the Vericaon Code text eld.
2) Check the checkbox of The Hik-Connect service will require internet access. Please read Service Terms and Privacy Statement before enabling the service.
3) Scan the QR code on the interface to read the Service Terms and the Privacy Statement.
4) Click OK to save the seings and return to the Hik-Connect interface.

i NOTE

● Hik-Connect is disabled by default.
● The vericaon code is empty when the device leaves factory.
● The vericaon code must contain 6 to 12 leers or numbers and is case sensitive.
- Every me you enable Hik-Connect, the Service Terms interface pops up and you should check the checkbox before enabling it.

Step 3 (Oponal) Check the checkbox of Custom and input the Server Address.

Step 4 (Oponal) Check the checkbox of Enable Stream Encrypon.

Aer this feature is enabled, the vericaon code is required for remote access and live view.

You can use the scanning tool of your phone to quickly get the code of the device by scanning the QR code below.

Enable Access Type Hik-Connect Server Address dev.hik-connect.com Custom Enable Stream Encryption Verification Code asdfgh Status Offline

Figure 12-5 Hik-Connect Sengs Interface

Step 5 Click Apply to save the sengs.

Step 6 Aer conguraon, you can access and manage the DVR by your mobile phone or by the website (www.hik-connect.com).

- For the iOS users, please scan the QR code below to download the Hik-Connect applicaon for the subsequent operaons.

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

Figure 12-6 QR Code for iOS Users

- For the Android users, please scan the QR code below to download the Hik-Connect applicaon for the subsequent operations. You must install googleplay on your Android mobile phone to skip to the address successfully.

QR code image containing encoded data, no visible human-readable text

Figure 12-7 QR Code for Android Users

Please refer to the help le on the ocial website (www.hik-connect.com) and the Hik-Connect Mobile Client User Manual for adding the device to Hik-Connect and more operation instrucons.

12.2.3 Configuring DDNS

Purpose

If your DVR is set to use PPPoE as its default network conncon, you may set Dynamic DNS (DDNS) to be used for network access.

Prior registraon with your ISP is required before conguring the system to use DDNS.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Network > DDNS.

Step 2 Check the Enable DDNS checkbox to enable this feature.

Step 3 Select DDNS Type. Three dierent DDNS types are selectable: DynDNS, PeanutHull, and NO-IP.

- DynDNS:

1) Enter Server Address for DynDNS (i.e. members.dyndns.org).
2) In the Device Domain Name text eld, enter the domain obtained from the DynDNS website.
3) Enter the User Name and Password registered in the DynDNS website.

Enable DDNS DDNS Type DynDNS Area/Country Custom Server Address members.dyndns.org Device Domain Name 123.dyndns.com Status DDNS is disabled. User Name lest Password *****

Figure 12-8 DynDNS Sengs Interface

- PeanutHull: Enter the User Name and Password obtained from the PeanutHull website.

Enable DDNS DDNS Type PeanutHull Area/Country Custom Server Address Device Domain Name Status DDNS is disabled. User Name 123.gclip.net Password

Figure 12-9 PeanutHull Sengs Interface

NO-IP:

Enter the account informaon in the corresponding elds. Refer to the DynDNS sengs.

1) Enter Server Address for NO-IP.
2) In the Device Domain Name text eld, enter the domain obtained from the NO-IP website (www.no-ip.com).
3) Enter the User Name and Password registered in the NO-IP website.

Enable DDNS DDNS Type NO-IP Area/Country Custom Server Address=no-ip.org Device Domain Name 123.no-ip.org Status DDNS is disabled. User Name Hydro Password **********

Figure 12-10 NO-IP Sengs Interface

Step 4 Click the Apply buon to save and exit the interface.

12.2.4 Configuring NTP Server

Purpose

A Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server can be congured on your DVR to ensure the accuracy of system date/me.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Network > NTP.

Enable NTP	✓
Interval (min)	60
NTP Server	210.72.145.44
NTP Port	123

Figure 12-11 NTP Sengs Interface

Step 2 Check the Enable NTP checkbox to enable this feature.

Step 3 Congure the following NTP sengs:

• Interval: Time interval between the two synchronizing acons with NTP server. The unit is minute.
  ● NTP Server: IP address of NTP server.
  ● NTP Port: Port of NTP server.

Step 4 Click the Apply buon to save and exit the interface.

i NOTE

The me synchronizaon interval can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes, and the default value is 60 minutes. If the DVR is connected to a public network, you should use a NTP server that has a me synchronizaon funcon, such as the server at the Naonal Time Center (IP Address: 210.72.145.44). If the DVR is set in a more customized network, NTP soware can be used to establish a NTP server used for me synchronizaon.

12.2.5 Configuring NAT

Purpose

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP™) can permit the device seamlessly discover the presence of other network devices on the network and establish functional network services for data sharing, communicaons, etc. You can use the UPnP™ function to enable the fast conncon of the device to the WAN via a router without port mapping.

Before you start

If you want to enable the UPnP™ funcon of the device, you must enable the UPnP™ funcon of the router to which your device is connected. When the network working mode of the device is set as mul-address, the Default Route of the device should be in the same network segment as that of the LAN IP address of the router.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Network > NAT.

Enable UPnP Mapping Type Auto Port Type Edit External ... External IP Address Port UPnP Status HTTP Port 80 0.0.0.0 80 Inactive RTSP Port 554 0.0.0.0 554 Inactive Server Port 8000 0.0.0.0 8000 Inactive HTTPS Port 443 0.0.0.0 443 Inactive Refresh

Figure 12-12 UPnP™ Settings Interface

Step 2 Check Enable UPnP checkbox to enable UPnP™.

Step 3 Select the Mapping Type as Manual or Auto in the drop-down list.

OPTION 1: Auto

If you select Auto, the Port Mapping items are read-only, and the external ports are set by the router automacally.

1) Click Apply buon to save the setngs.
2) You can click Refresh button to get the latest status of the port mapping.

Enable UPnP Mapping Type Auto Port Type Edit External ... External IP Address Port UPnP Status HTTP Port 80 0.0.0.0 80 Inactive RTSP Port 564 0.0.0.0 564 Inactive Server Port 8000 0.0.0.0 8000 Inactive HTTPS Port 443 0.0.0.0 443 Inactive Refresh

Figure 12-13 UPnP™ Sengs Finished-Auto

OPTION 2: Manual

If you select Manual as the mapping type, you can edit the external port on your demand by clicking to acvate the External Port Sengs dialog box.

1) Click ☐ to acvate the External Port Settings dialog box. Congure the external port No. for server port, hp port and RTSP port respectively.

i NOTE

● You can use the default port No., or change it according to actual requirements.
● External Port indicates the port No. for port mapping in the router.
- The value of the RTSP port No. should be 554 or between 1024 and 65535, while the value of the other ports should be between 1 and 65535 and the value must be dierent from each other. If mulple devices are congured for the UPnP™ sengs under the same router, the value of the port No. for each device should be unique.

External Port Settings Port Type Server Port External Port 8002 OK Cancel

Figure 12-14 External Port Sengs Dialog Box

2) Click Apply buon to save the setngs.
3) You can click Refresh button to get the latest status of the port mapping.

Enable UPnP Mapping Type Manual Port Type Edit External Port Mapping IP Address Port Status Server Port 8002 172.6.21.31 8000 Active HTTP Port 80 172.6.21.31 80 Active RTSP Port 554 172.6.21.31 554 Active HTTPS Port 443 172.6.21.31 443 Active Refresh

Figure 12-15 UPnP™ Sengs Finished-Manual

12.2.6 Configuring More Settings

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Network > More Sengs.

Alarm Host IP
Alarm Host Port	0
Server Port	8000
HTTP Port	80
Multicast IP
RTSP Port	554
Output Bandwidth Limit	■
Output Bandwidth (Mbps)	200

Figure 12-16 More Sengs Interface

Step 2 Congure the remote alarm host, server port, HTTP port, mulcast, and RTSP port.

- Alarm Host IP/Port: With a remote alarm host congured, the device will send the alarm event or excepon message to the host when an alarm is triggered. The remote alarm host must have the CMS (Client Management System) soware installed.

The Alarm Host IP refers to the IP address of the remote PC on which the CMS (Client Management System) soware (e.g., iVMS-4200) is installed, and the Alarm Host Port must be the same as the alarm monitoring port congured in the soware (default port is 7200).

- Mulcast IP: The mulcast can be congured to realize live view for more than the maximum number of cameras through network. A mulcast address spans the Class-D IP range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. It is recommended to use the IP address ranging from 239.252.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

When adding a device to the CMS (Client Management System) soware, the mulcast address must be the same as the device's mulcast IP.

- RTSP Port: The RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) is a network control protocol designed for use in entertainment and communications systems to control streaming media servers.

Enter the RTSP port in the text eld of RTSP Port. The default RTSP port is 554, and you can change it according to dierent requirements.

- Server Port and HTTP Port: Enter the Server Port and HTTP Port in the text elds. The default Server Port is 8000 and the HTTP Port is 80, and you can change them according to dierent requirements.

NOTE

The Server Port should be set to the range of 2000-65535 and it is used for remote client soware access. The HTTP port is used for remote IE access.

- Output Bandwidth Limit: You can check the checkbox to enable output bandwidth limit.

- Output Bandwidth: Aer enable the output bandwidth limit, input the output bandwidth in the text eld.

NOTE

● The output bandwidth limit is used for the remote live view and playback.
● The default output bandwidth is the maximum limit.

Step 3 Click the Apply buon to save and exit the interface.

12.2.7 Configuring HTTPS Port

Purpose

HTTPS provides authencaon of the web site and associated web server that one is communicang with, which protects against Man-in-the-middle aacks. Perform the following steps to set the port number of hps.

Example

If you set the port number as 443 and the IP address is 192.0.0.64, you may access the device by inpung hps://192.0.0.64:443 via the web browser.

NOTE

The HTTPS port can be only congured through the web browser.

Step 1 Open web browser, input the IP address of device, and the web server will select the language automacally according to the system language and maximize the web browser.

Step 2 Input the correct user name and password, and click Login buon to log in the device.

Step 3 Go to Conguraon > Remote Conguraon > Network Setngs > HTTPS.

Step 4 Create the self-signed cercate or authorized cercate.

HTTPS Enable HTTPS Create Create Self-signed Certificate Create Certificate Request Install Signed Certificate Certificate Path Provider Upload Created Request Created Request Delete Download Installed Certificate Installed Certificate Delete Save

Figure 12-17 HTTPS Sengs

OPTION 1: Create the self-signed cercate

1) Click the Create button to create the following dialog box.

Country CN ^ example CN Hostname/P 172.6.23.87 Validity 200 Day* range :1-5000 Password State or province Locality Organization Organizational Unit Email OK Cancel

Figure 12-18 Create Self-signed Cercate

2) Enter the country, host name/IP, validity and other informaon.
3) Click OK to save the sengs.

OPTION 2: Create the authorized cercate

1) Click the Create button to create the cercate request.
2) Download the cercate request and submit it to the trusted cercate authority for signature.
3) Aer receiving the signed valid cercate, import the cercate to the device.

Step 5 There will be the cercate informaon aer you successfully create and install the cercate.

Installed Certificate Installed Certificate C=CN, HIP=172.6.23.110 Delete Property Subject: C=CN, HIP=172.6.23.110 Issuer: C=CN, HIP=172.6.23.110 Validity: 2013-06-28 10:42:40 ~ 2013-06-30 10:42:40

Figure 12-19 Installed Cercate Property

Step 6 Check the checkbox to enable the HTTPS funcon.

Step 7 Click the Save button to save the sengs.

12.2.8 Configuring Email

Purpose

The system can be congured to send an Email nocao on to all designated users if an event is detected, e.g. an alarm or moon event is detected, etc.

Before conguring the Email sengs, the DVR must be connected to a local area network (LAN) that maintains an SMTP mail server. The network must also be connected to either an intranet or the Internet depending on the locaon of the e-mail accounts to which you want to send nocaaon. Additional, the Preferred DNS server must be congured.

Before you start

Make sure you have congured the IPv4 Address, IPv4 Subnet Mask, IPv4 Gateway and the Preferred DNS Server in the Network Sengs menu. Please refer to Chapter 12.1 Conguring General Sengs for detailed informaon.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Network > Email.

Step 2 Select the Email tab to enter the Email Sengs interface.

Enable Server... ✓ User Name Password SMTP Server SMTP Port 25 Enable SSL/T... Sender Sender's Address Select Receivers Receiver 1 Receiver Receiver's Address Enable Attached Picture Interval 2s

Figure 12-20 Email Sengs Interface

Step 3 Congure the following Email sengs:

Enable Server Authencaon (oponal): Check the checkbox to enable the server authencaon feature.

User Name: The user account of sender's Email for SMTP server authenticaon.

Password: The password of sender's Email for SMTP server authencaon.

SMTP Server: The SMTP Server IP address or host name (e.g., smtp.263xmail.com).

SMTP Port: The SMTP port. The default TCP/IP port used for SMTP is 25.

Enable SSL (oponal): Click the checkbox to enable SSL if required by the SMTP server.

Sender: The name of sender.

Sender's Address: The Email address of sender.

Select Receivers: Select the receiver. Up to 3 receivers can be congured.

Receiver: The name of the receiver of the Email.

Receiver's Address: The Email address of the receiver.

Enable Attached Picture: Check the checkbox if you want to send email with aached alarm images. The interval is the me between two captures of the alarm images.

NOTE

• For the IP cameras, the alarm images are directly sent as the aached pictures by Email. Up to one picture can be sent for one IP camera. The aached pictures of the linked cameras cannot be sent.
• For analog cameras, 3 aached pictures can be sent for one analog camera when the alarm is triggered.

Interval: The interval refers to the me between two acons of sending aached pictures.

E-mail Test: Sends a test message to verify that the SMTP server can be reached.

Step 4 Click the Apply buon to save the Email sengs.

Step 5 You can click the Test buon to test whether your Email sengs work. The corresponding Aenon message box pops up.

Attention Failed to send test email, please check the parameters or network status. OK

Attention Email test succeeded. OK

Figure 12-21 Email Tesng Aenon

12.2.9 Checking Network Traffic

Purpose

You can check the network trac to obtain real-me informaon of DVR such as linking status, MTU, sending/receiving rate, etc.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect > Traic.

Figure 12-22 Network Trac Interface

Step 2 You can view the sending rate and receiving rate informaon on the interface. The trac data is refreshed every 1 second.

12.3 Configuring Network Detection

Purpose

You can obtain network connecng status of DVR through the network detecon funcon, including network delay, packet loss, etc.

12.3.1 Testing Network Delay and Packet Loss

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect > Network Detecon.

Traffic Network Detection Network Stat. Network Delay, Packet Loss Test Select NIC LAN1 Destination Address Network Packet Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 LAN1 10.16.1.102 827Kbps Test Refresh Export

Figure 12-23 Network Detecon Interface

Step 2 Select a NIC to test network delay and packet loss.

Step 3 Enter the desnation address in the text eld of Desnaon Address.

Step 4 Click the Test buon to start tesng network delay and packet loss.

12.3.2 Exporting Network Packet

Purpose

By connecng the DVR to network, the captured network data packet can be exported to USB-ash disk, SATA and other local backup devices.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect > Network Detecon.

Step 2 Select the backup device from the drop-down list of Device Name.

NOTE

Click the Refresh button if the connected local backup device cannot be displayed. When it fails to detect the backup device, please check whether it is compatible with the DVR. You can format the backup device if the format is incorrect.

Traffic Network Detection Network Stat. Network Delay, Packet Loss Test Select NIC LAN1 Destination Address Network Packet Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 LAN1 10.16.1.102 827Kbps Test Refresh Export

Figure 12-24 Export Network Packet

Step 3 Click the Export buon to start exporng.

Step 4 Aer the exporng is complete, click OK to nish the packet export.

Attention Packet export succeeded. OK

Figure 12-25 Packet Export Aenon

NOTE

Up to 1M data can be exported each me.

12.3.3 Checking Network Status

Purpose

You can also check the network status and quick set the network parameters in this interface.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect > Network Detecon.

Step 2 Click Status on the right boom of the interface.

Traffic Network Detection Network Stat. Network Delay. Packet Loss Test Select NIC LAN1 Destination Address Test Network Packet Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 LAN1 10.16.2.18 4.671Kbps Refresh Export

Figure 12-26 Checking Network Status

If the network is normal the following message box pops out.

Result Network status is normal. OK

Figure 12-27 Network Status Checking Result

If the message box pops out with other informaon instead of this one, you can click Network buon to show the quick seng interface of the network parameters.

Network NIC Type 10M/100M Self-adaptive Enable DHCP ✓ IPv4 Address 10 .16 .5 .20 IPv4 Subnet Mask 255 .255 .255 .0 IPv4 Default Gateway 10 .16 .5 .254 Enable DNS DHCP Preferred DNS Serv... Alternate DNS Server Apply OK Cancel

Figure 12-28 Network Parameters Conguraon

12.3.4 Checking Network Statistics

Purpose:

You can check the network stascs to obtain the real-me informaon of the device.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance> Net Detect > Network Stat.

Type Bandwidth IP Camera 8,192Kbps Remote Live View 0bps Remote Playback 0bps Net Total Idle 88Mbps Refresh

Figure 12-29 Network Stat. Interface

Step 2 View the bandwidth of Remote Live View, bandwidth of Remote Playback, and bandwidth of Net Total Idle.

Step 3 Click Refresh buon to get the latest bandwidth stascs.

Chapter 13 RAID

NOTE

This chapter is applicable for DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series DVR.

13.1 Configuring Array

Purpose

RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is a storage technology that combines mulple disk drive components into a logical unit. A RAID setup stores data over mulple hard disk drives to provide enough redundancy so that data can be recovered if one disk fails. Data is distributed across the drives in one of several ways called "RAID levels", depending on what level of redundancy and performance is required.

The DVR supports the disk array that is realized by soware. You can enable the RAID funcon on your demand.

NOTE

The DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR support the RAID0, RAID1, RAID5, RAID6 and RAID 10 array types.

Before you start

Please install the HDD(s) properly and it is recommended to use the same enterprise-level HDDs (including model and capacity) for array creation and configuration so as to maintain reliable and stable running of the disks.

Introducon

The DVR can store the data (such as record, picture, log informaon) in the HDD only aer you have created the array or you have congured network HDD (refer to Chapter14.2 Managing Network HDD). Our device provides two ways for creang array, including one-touch conguraon and manual conguraon. The following ow chart shows the process of creang array.

graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Enter Disk Mode Interface"]
    B --> C["Enable RAID"]
    C --> D["Enter Physical Disk Interface"]
    D --> E["Manual Creation"]
    D --> F["One-touch Creation"]
    E --> G["Creating Array Finished"]
    G --> H["Array Initialization"]
    F --> I["Creating Array Finished"]
    I --> J["RAID0"]
    H --> K["RAID1, RAID5 and RAID 10"]
    J --> L["Array Initialization"]
    L --> M["RAID0"]
    M --> N["Enter HDD Information Interface"]
    N --> O["HDD Auto-initialization"]
    O --> P["Normal HDD"]
    P --> Q["End"]

Figure 13-1 RAID Working Flow

13.1.2 Enable RAID

Purpose

Perform the following steps to enable the RAID funcon, or the disk array cannot be created.

- OPTION 1:

Enable the RAID funcon in the Wizard when the device startup, please refer to step 7 of Chapter 2.3.2.

- OPTION 2:

Enable the RAID funcon in the HDD Management Interface.

Step 1 Enter the Disk Mode conguraon interface.

Menu > HDD > Advanced

Disk Mode Storage Mode Disk Clone Enable RAID

Figure 13-2 Enable RAID Interface

Step 2 Check the checkbox of Enable RAID.

Step 3 Click the Apply buon to save the sengs.

Step 4 Reboot the device to take RAID into eect.

13.1.3 One-touch Configuration

Purpose

Through one-touch conguraon, you can quickly create the disk array. By default, the array type to be created is RAID 5.

Before you start

1. The RAID funcon should be enabled, please refer to the Chapter 13.1.1 for details.
2. As the default array type is RAID 5, please install at least 3 HDDs in you device.
3. If more than 10 HDDs are installed, 2 arrays can be congured.

Step 1 Enter the RAID conguraon interface.

Menu > HDD > RAID

Physical Disk Array Firmware No. Capacity Array Type Status Model Hot Sp... ✓ 2 465.76GB Normal Functional WDC WD5000YS-0... ✓ 6 931.51GB Normal Functional ST31000524NS ✓ 7 931.51GB Normal Functional WDC WD10EVVS-6... One-touch C... Create

Figure 13-3 Physical Disk Interface

Step 2 Check the checkbox of corresponding HDD No. to select it.

Step 3 Click the One-touch Cong buon to enter the One-touch Array Conguration interface.

One-touch Array Configuration Array Name OK Cancel

Figure 13-4 One-touch Array Conguraon

Step 4 Edit the array name in the Array Name text led and click OK button to start conguring array.

If you install 4 HDDs or above for one-touch conguraon, a hot spare disk will be set by default. It is recommended to set hot spare disk for automacally rebuilding the array when the array is abnormal.

Step 5 When the array conguraon is completed, click OK button in the pop-up message box to nish the sengs.

Step 6 You can click Array tab to view the informaon of the successfully created array.

By default, one-touch conguraon creates an array and a virtual disk.

Physical Disk Array Firmware No. Name Free Space Physic... Hot ... Status Level Re... Del... Task 1 array1_1 931/931G 2 6 7 Functi... RAID 5 Initialize (Fast)(R)

Figure 13-5 Array Sengs Interface

Step 7 A created array displays as an HDD in the HDD informaon interface.

HDD Information L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... 1 931.52GB Initializing 82% R/W Array 0MB 1 - -

Figure 13-6 HDD Informaon Interface

13.1.4 Manually Creating Array

Purpose

You can manually create the array of RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID6 and RAID 10.

In this chapter, we take RAID 5 as an example to describe the manual conguraon of array and virtual disk.

Step 1 Enter the Physical Disk Sengs interface.

Menu > HDD > RAID > Physical Disk

Physical Disk Array Firmware No. Capacity Array Type Status Model Hot Sp... 2 465.76GB Normal Functional WDC WD5000YS-0... 6 931.51GB Normal Functional ST31000524NS 7 931.51GB Normal Functional WDC WD10EVVS-6... One-touch C... Create

Figure 13-7 Physical Disk Sengs Interface

Step 2 Click Creat buon to enter the Create Array interface.

Create Array Array Name array RAID Level RAID 5 Initialization Type Initialize (Fast) Physical Disk 2 6 7 Array Capacity (Estimated): 931GB OK Cancel

Figure 13-8 Create Array Interface

Step 3 Edit the Array Name; set the RAID Level to RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID6 or RAID 10; select the Physical Disk that you want to congure array.

NOTE

• If you choose RAID 0, at least 2 HDDs must be installed.
• If you choose RAID 1, 2 HDDs need to be congured for RAID 1.
• If you choose RAID 5, at least 3 HDDs must be installed.
• If you choose RAID 6, at least 4 HDDs must be installed.
• If you choose RAID 10, the number of HDDs installed should be even in the range of 4 to 16

Step 4 Click OK buon to create array.

i NOTE

If the number of HDDs you select is not compatible with the requirement of the RAID level, the error message box will pop up.

Attention i Physical disk count error. OK

Figure 13-9 Error Message Box

Step 5 You can click Array tab to view the successfully created array.

Physical Disk Array Firmware No. Name Free Space Physic... Hot ... Status Level Re... Del... Task 1 array1_1 931/931G 2 6 7 Functl... RAID 5 Initialize (Fast)(R)

Figure 13-10 Array Sengs Interface

13.2 Rebuilding Array

Purpose

The working status of array includes Funconal, Degraded and Oine. By viewing the array status, you can take immediate and proper maintenance for the disks so as to ensure the high security and reliability of the data stored in the disk array.

When there is no disk loss in the array, the working status of array will change to Funconal; when the number of lost disks has exceeded the limit, the working status of array will change to Oine; in other conditions, the working status is Degraded.

When the virtual disk is in Degraded status, you can restore it to Funconal by array rebuilding.

Before you start

Please make sure the hot spare disk is congured.

Step 1 Enter the Physical Disk Sengs interface to conjure the hot spare disk.

No. Capacity Array Type Status Model Hot Sp... 1 931.51GB Normal Functional ST31000340NS 3 931.51GB RAID5 Array Functional ST31000526SV 5 931.51GB RAID5 Array Functional WDC WD10EVVS-6 7 931.51GB RAID5 Array Functional WDC WD10EVVS-6 One-touch C... Create

Figure 13-11 Physical Disk Sengs Interface

Step 2 Select a disk and click to set it as the hot spare disk.

Only global hot spare mode is supported.

13.2.2 Automatically Rebuilding Array

Purpose

When the virtual disk is in Degraded status, the device can start rebuilding the array automacally with the hot spare disk to ensure the high security and reliability of the data.

Step 1 Enter the Array Sengs interface. The status of the array is Degraded. Since the hot spare disk is congured, the system will automacally start rebuilding using it.

Menu > HDD > RAID > Array

Physical Disk Array Firmware No. Name Free Space Physic... Hot ... Status Level Re... Del... Task 1 array1_1 931/931G 2 6 7 Degraded RAID 5 Rebuild(Run)

Figure 13-12 Array Sengs Interface

If there is no hot spare disk aer rebuilding, it is recommended to install a HDD into the device and set is as a hot spare disk to ensure the high security and reliability of the array.

13.2.3 Manually Rebuilding Array

Purpose

If the hot spare disk has not been congured, you can rebuild the array manually to restore the array when the virtual disk is in Degraded status.

Step 1 Enter the Array Sengs interface. The disk 3 is lost.

Menu > HDD > RAID > Array

Physical Disk Array Firmware No. Name Free Space Physic... Hot ... Status Level Re... Del... Task 1 array1_1 931/931G 2 6 Degraded RAID 5 None

Figure 13-13 Array Sengs Interface

Step 2 Click Array tab to return to the Array Sengs interface and click rebuild.

to congure the array

At least one available physical disk should exist for rebuilding the array.

Rebuild Array Array Name array1_1 RAID Level RAID 5 Array Disk 2 6 Physical Disk ●7 OK Cancel

Figure 13-14 Rebuild Array Interface

Step 3 Select the available physical disk and click OK buon to confirm to rebuild the array.

Step 4 The "Do not unplug the physical disk when it is under rebuilding" message box pops up. Click OK buon to start rebuilding.

Step 5 You can enter the Array Sengs interface to view the rebuilding status.

Step 6 Aer rebuilding successfully, the array and virtual disk will restore to Funconal.

13.3 Deleting Array

Deleng array will cause to delete all the data saved in the disk.

Step 1 Enter the Array Sengs interface.

Menu>HDD>RAID>Array

Physical Disk Array Firmware No. Name Free Space Physic... Hot ... Status Level Re... Del... Task 1 array_1 931/931G 2 7 10 Functi... RAID 5 None

Figure 13-15 Array Sengs Interface

Step 2 Select an array and click into delete the array.

Attention The removal of the array will cause ALL data on it to be deleted. Continue? Yes No

Figure 13-16 Conrm Array Deleon

Step 3 In the pop-up message box, click Yes buon to conrm the array deleon.

Deleng array will cause to delete all the data in the array.

13.4 Checking and Editing Firmware

Purpose

You can view the informaon of the rmware and set the background task speed on the Firmware interface.

Step 1 Enter the Firmware interface to check the informaon of the rmware, including the version, maximum physical disk quantity, maximum array quantity, auto-rebuild status, etc.

Physical Disk Array Firmware Version 1.1.0.0002 Physical Disk Count 16 Array Count 16 Virtual Disk Count 0 RAID Level 0 1 5 10 Hot Spare Type Global Hot Spare Support Rebuild Yes Background Task Speed Medium Speed

Figure 13-17 Firmware Interface

Step 2 You can set the Background Task Speed in the drop-down list.

Step 3 Click Apply to save the seings.

Chapter 14 HDD Management

14.1 Initializing HDDs

Purpose

A newly installed hard disk drive (HDD) must be inialized before it can be used with your DVR.

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > General.

Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gro., Edit Delete 3 2794.52GB Normal R/W Local 2272.00GB 1 - - Total Capacity 2794.52GB Free Space 2272.00GB Remaining Recording Timecode 4 Add Init Back

Figure 14-1 HDD Informaon Interface

You can view the Total Capacity, Free Space and Remaining Recording Time of the HDD. The algorithm of the Remaining Recording Time is to use average bit rate for the channel enabling smart encoding to raise accuracy.

Step 2 Select HDD to be inialized.

Step 3 Click the Init buon.

Initialize Initialization will erase all data on the HDD. Continue? OK Cancel

Figure 14-2 Conrm Inializaon

Step 4 Select the OK buon to start inializaon.

L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... 1 931.51GB Formatting 34% R/W Local 0MB 1 -

Figure 14-3 Start Inializaon

Step 5 Aer the HDD has been initialized, the status of the HDD will change from Uninialized to Normal.

L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... 1 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 927GB 1 -

Figure 14-4 HDD Status Changes to Normal

NOTE

Initializing the HDD will erase all data on it.

The HDDs which are free of working for a long me can be enabled to sleep, thus to decrease the power consumption of the device and extend the life of the HDDs.

Go to Menu > HDD > Advanced.

Enable HDD Sleeping

Figure 14-5 Enable HDD Sleeping

Check the checkbox of Enable HDD Sleeping (by default), and the HDDs which are free of working for a long me will be set to sleep.

Uncheck the checkbox of Enable HDD Sleeping, and the HDDs will be set to work for all me.

14.2 Managing Network HDD

Purpose

You can add the allocated NAS or disk of IP SAN to DVR, and use it as network HDD.

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > General.

L... C: 1 Normal Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... 1 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 927GB 1 -

Figure 14-6 HDD Informaon Interface

Step 2 Click the Add buon to enter the Add NetHDD interface, as shown in Figure 14-7.

Add NetHDD NetHDD NetHDD 1 Type NAS NetHDD IP Address . . . NetHDD Directory Search OK Cancel

Figure 14-7 HDD Informaon Interface

Step 3 Add the allocated NetHDD.

Step 4 Select the type to NAS or IP SAN.

Step 5 Congure the NAS or IP SAN sengs.

- Add NAS disk:

1) Enter the NetHDD IP address in the text eld.
2) Click Search to search the available NAS disks.
3) Select the NAS disk from the list shown below.

Or you can just manually enter the directory in the text eld of NetHDD Directory.

4) Click OK to add the congured NAS disk.

NOTE

Up to 8 NAS disks can be added.

Add NetHDD NetHDD NetHDD 1 Type NAS NetHDD IP Address 172.6 .24 .201 NetHDD Directory /dvr/dvr_1 No. Directory 1 /dvr/dvr_2 2 /dvr/dvr_1 3 /mnt/backup/indexbackup Search OK Cancel

Figure 14-8 Add NAS Disk

- Add IP SAN:

1) Enter the NetHDD IP address in the text eld.
2) Click the Search buon to the available IP SAN disks.
3) Select the IP SAN disk from the list shown below.
4) Click the OK buon to add the selected IP SAN disk.

Up to 8 IP SAN disks can be added.

Add NetHDD NetHDD NetHDD 1 Type IP SAN NetHDD IP Address 172 9 2 .210 NetHDD Directory ign 2004-05 stores t-8 No. Directory 1 ign 2004-05 stores t-8 2 ign 2004-05 stores t-41 3 ign 2004-05 stores t-1000 Search OK Cancel

Figure 14-9 Add IP SAN Disk

5) Aer having successfully added the NAS or IP SAN disk, return to the HDD Informaon menu. The added NetHDD will be displayed in the list.

If the added NetHDD is uninitialized, please select it and click the Init button for inializaon.

L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... ✓ 1 931.51GB Normal RAW Local 906GB 1 ✓ 17 40,000MB Normal RAW IP SAN 22,528MB 1

Figure 14-10 Inialize Added NetHDD

14.3 Managing HDD Group

14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups

Purpose

Mulple HDDs can be managed in groups. Video from specied channels can be recorded onto a parcular HDD group through HDD sengs.

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > Advanced.

Step 2 Set the Mode to Group, as shown below.

Mode Group Record on HDD Group 1 Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16

Figure 14-11 Storage Mode Interface

Step 3 Click the Apply buon and the following Aenon box will pop up.

Attention Reboot to take effect of the changing of the storage mode. Continue? Yes No

Figure 14-12 Aenon for Reboot

Step 4 Click the Yes buon to reboot the device to acvate the changes.

Step 5 Aer reboot of device, go to Menu > HDD > General.

Step 6 Select HDD from the list and click the 📋 icon to enter the Local HDD Sengs interface, as shown below.

Local HDD Settings HDD No. 5 HDD Property ● RW ● Read-only ● Redundancy Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 HDD Capacity 931GB Apply OK Cancel

Figure 14-13 Local HDD Sengs Interface

Step 7 Select the Group number for the current HDD.

NOTE

The default group No. for each HDD is 1.

Step 8 Click the OK buon to conrm the sengs.

Attention Regroup the cameras for HDD if the HDD group number is changed. Yes No

Figure 14-14 Conrm HDD Group Sengs

Step 9 In the pop-up Aenon box, click the Yes buon to nish the sengs.

14.3.2 Setting HDD Property

Purpose

The HDD property can be set to redundancy, read-only or read/write (R/W). Before seng the HDD property, please set the storage mode to Group (refer to step1-4 of Chapter 14.3.1 Seng HDD Groups).

A HDD can be set to read-only to prevent important recorded les from being overwrien when the HDD becomes full in overwrite recording mode.

When the HDD property is set to redundancy, the video can be recorded both onto the redundancy HDD and the R/W HDD simultaneously so as to ensure high security and reliability of video data.

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > General.

Step 2 Select HDD from the list and click the 📋 icon to enter the Local HDD Sengs interface, as shown below.

Local HDD Settings HDD No. 1 HDD Property ● R/W ● Read-only ● Redundancy Group ● 1 ● 2 ● 3 ● 4 ● 5 ● 6 ● 7 ● 8 ● 9 ● 10 ● 11 ● 12 ● 13 ● 14 ● 15 ● 16 HDD Capacity 931.51GB Apply OK Cancel

Figure 14-15 Set HDD Property

Step 3 Set the HDD property to R/W, Read-only or Redundancy.

Step 4 Click the OK buon to save the settings and exit the interface.

Step 5 In the HDD Informaon menu, the HDD property will be displayed in the list.

At least 2 hard disks must be added on your DVR when you want to set a HDD to Redundancy, and there is one HDD with R/W property.

14.4 Configuring Quota Mode

Purpose

Each camera can be congured with allocated quota for the storage of recorded les.

Steps

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > Advanced > Storage Mode.

Step 2 Set the Mode to Quota, as shown below.

NOTE

The DVR must be rebooted to enable the changes to take eect.

Mode Quota Camera [A1] Camera 01 Used Record Capacity 51.00GB Used Picture Capacity 2048.00MB HDD Capacity (GB) 931 Max. Record Capacity (G... 0 Max. Picture Capacity (GB) 0 ▲ Free Quota Space 931 GB Enable HDD Sleeping

Figure 14-16 Storage Mode Sengs Interface

Step 3 Select a camera for which you want to congure quota.

Step 4 Enter the storage capacity in the text eld of Max. Record Capacity (GB).

Step 5 You can copy the quota settings of the current camera to other cameras if required. Click the Copy buon to enter the Copy Camera interface, as shown below.

Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 IP Camera D1 D2 OK Cancel

Figure 14-17 Copy Sengs to Other Camera(s)

Step 6 Select the camera (s) to be congured with the same quota sengs. You can also click the checkbox of Analog to select all cameras.

Step 7 Click the OK buon to nish the Copy sengs and back to the Storage Mode interface.

Step 8 Click the Apply buon to apply the seings.

i NOTE

If the quota capacity is set to 0, then all cameras will use the total capacity of HDD for record.

14.5 Configuring Cloud Storage

Purpose

The cloud storage facilitates you to upload and download the recorded les at any me and any place, which can highly enhance the eciency.

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > General > Cloud Storage.

Step 2 Check the Enable Cloud checkbox to enable the feature.

Step 3 Select the Cloud Type from the drop-down list to One Drive, Google Drive or Drop Box.

HDD Information Cloud Storage Enable Cloud Cloud Type OneDrive Authorization Code ABCDE Status Offline Use a mobile browser to scan the OR code to log in the selected cloud to get the authorization code. Camera [A1] Camera 01 Upload Type Record Enable Event Upload *Note: Only sub-stream recorded files can be uploaded to the Cloud Storage. Please configure the event triggered recording schedule and enable the corresponding event type. Copy Apply Back

Figure 14-18 Cloud Storage Interface

Step 4 According to the prompts, you are required to use a mobile browser to scan the QR code to log in the selected cloud to get the authencaon code. And then copy the authencaon code to the Authencaon Code text led.

Step 5 Click Apply and then back to the main menu.

Step 6 Enter the cloud storage interface again about 20s later. When the Status shows online, it indicates the successful registraon.

Step 7 Congure the recording schedule.

Back to enter the record interface, choose a certain camera from the Camera drop-down list and check the Enable Schedule checkbox to enable the schedule recording. For detailed recording schedule, refer to 5.2 Conguring Recording and Capture Schedule.

Record Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Schedule Mon 1 Tue 2 Wed 3 Thu 4 Fri 5 Sat 6 Sun 7 Edit Continuous Event Motion Alarm M | A M & A POS None Copy Apply Back

Figure 14-19 Record Schedule

Step 8 Upload the event triggered recording les to the cloud storage.

1) Back to enter the cloud storage interface, and select the camera you have set in the recording schedule interface.

2) Select the upload type in the Upload Type text led.
3) Check the Enable Event Upload checkbox.
4) Click Apply to nish the sengs.

HDD Information Cloud Storage Enable Cloud Cloud Type OneDrive Authorization Code ABCDE Status Offline Use a mobile browser to scan the OR code to log in the selected cloud to get the authorization code. Camera [A1] Camera 01 Upload Type Record Enable Event Upload *Note: Only sub-stream recorded files can be uploaded to the Cloud Storage. Please configure the event triggered recording schedule and enable the corresponding event type. Copy Apply Back

Figure 14-20 Upload to Cloud Storage Interface

NOTE

• Only the sub-stream recorded les can be uploaded to the Cloud Storage.
• Please conjure the event triggered recording schedule and enable the corresponding event type.

Step 9 (Oponal) You can click the Copy buon to copy the cloud storage sengs to other cameras. You can also click the checkbox of Analog/IP Camera to select all cameras. Click OK buon to back to the cloud storage interface and click Apply to nish the seings.

Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 IP Camera D1 OK Cancel

Figure 14-21 Copy to Interface

14.6 Configuring Disk Clone

This chapter is only applicable to the DVR with eSATA.

Purpose

If the S.M.A.R.T. detecon result declares the HDD is abnormal, you can choose to clone all the data on the HDD to an inserted eSATA disk manually. Refer to Chapter 14.8 Checking S.M.A.R.T. Informaon for details of S.M.A.R.T detecon.

Before you start

An eSATA disk should be connected to the device.

Step 1 Enter the HDD Advanced Seng interface:

Menu > HDD > Advanced

Step 2 Click the Disk Clone tab to enter the disk clone conguring interface.

Disk Mode Storage Mode Disk Clone Clone Source Label Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... 4 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 914GB 1 Clone Destination eSATA eSATA1 Usage Export Total Capacity 931.51GB Refresh Set Clone Back

Figure 14-22 Disk Clone Conguraon Interface

Step 3 Make sure the usage of the eSATA disk is set as Export.

If not, click the Set button to set it. Choose Export and click the OK buon.

eSATA Usage eSATA1: Export Record/Ca... OK Cancel

Figure 14-23 Setng eSATA Usage

The capacity of desnaon disk must be the same as that of the clone source disk.

Step 4 Check the checkbox of the HDD to be cloned in the Clone Source list.

Step 5 Click the Clone buon and a message box pops up.

Attention The clone operation will stop the record task, lasting about 7 hours. Continue? Yes No

Figure 14-24 Message Box for Disk Clone

Step 6 Click the Yes buon to connue.
You can check the clone progress in the HDD status.

Label	Capacity	Status	Property	Type	Free Space	Gr...
4	931.51GB	Cloning 01%	RAW	Local	0MB	1

Figure 14-25 Check Disk Clone Progress

14.7 Checking HDD Status

Purpose

You may check the status of the installed HDDs on DVR so as to take immediate check and maintenance in case of HDD failure.

Checking HDD Status in HDD Informaon Interface

Step 1 Go to Menu > HDD > General.

Step 2 Check the status of each HDD which is displayed on the list, as shown below.

L... Capacity Status Property Type Free Space Gr... Edit D... 1 931.51GB Normal R/W Local 900GB 1 17 199.97GB Normal Redundancy NAS 182GB 1

Figure 14-26 View HDD Status (1)

i NOTE

If the status of HDD is Normal or Sleeping, it works normally. If the status is Uninitialized or Abnormal, please inialize the HDD before use. And if the HDD inializaon is failed, please replace it with a new one.

Checking HDD Status in System Informaon Interface

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > System Info > HDD.

Step 2 View the status of each HDD displayed on the list, as shown below.

Label	Status	Capacity	Free Space	Property	Type	Group
1	Normal	931.51GB	900GB	R/W	Local	1
17	Normal	199.97GB	182GB	Redundancy	NAS	1

Figure 14-27 View HDD Status (2)

14.8 Checking S.M.A.R.T Information

Purpose

The S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporng Technology) is a monitoring system for HDD to detect and report on various indicators of reliability in the hopes of ancipang failures.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > HDD Detect > S.M.A.R.T. Sengs.

Step 2 Select the HDD to view its S.M.A.R.T. informaon list, as shown below.

NOTE

If you want to use the HDD even when the S.M.A.R.T. checking is failed, you can check the checkbox before the Connue to use this disk when self-evaluaon is failed item.

S.M.A.R.T. Settings Bad Sector Detection Continue to use this disk when self-evaluation is failed. HDD 1 Self-test Status Not tested Self-test Type Short Test S.M.A.R.T. Temperature(*... 34 Self-evaluation Pass Power On (da... 329 All-evaluation Functional S.M.A.R.T. Information ID Attribute Name Status Flags Threshold Value Worst Raw Value 0x1 Raw Read Error Rate OK 21 51 200 200 0 0x3 Spin Up Time OK 27 21 112 107 7375 0x4 Start/Stop Count OK 32 0 98 96 2333 0x5 Reallocated Sector Count OK 33 140 200 200 0

Figure 14-28 S.M.A.R.T Sengs Interface

14.9 Detecting Bad Sector

Purpose

You can detect the bad sector of the HDD to check the status of the HDD.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > HDD Detect > Bad Sector Detecon.

Step 2 Select a HDD and click the Detect buon to start detecng.

S.M.A.R.T. Settings Bad Sector Detection HDD No. 1 Key Area Detection Detect HDD Capac... 931.51GB Block Capa... 232MB Status Testing... 23% Error Count 0 Error Info Pause Cancel Normal Damaged Shield

Figure 14-29 Bad Sector Detecng

Step 3 You can click the Pause button to pause the detecon and click the Resume button to resume the detecon.

Step 4 If there is error informaon about the HDD, you can click the Error Info buon to view the informaon.

14.10 Configuring HDD Error Alarms

Purpose

You can congregate the HDD error alarms when the HDD status is Uninialized or Abnormal.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > Excepons.

Step 2 Select the Excepon Type to HDD Error from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Check the checkbox(s) below to select the linkage acon(s) for HDD error, as shown in Figure 12-26.

The linkage acons can be selected to: Audible Warning, Nofy Surveillance Center, Send Email and Trigger Alarm Output.

Exception Enable Event Hint Event Hint Settings Exception Type HDD Error Audible Warning Notify Surveillance Center Send Email Trigger Alarm Output ■Alarm Output No. 10.16.1.250:8000->1 ■10.16.1.250:8000->2 Apply Back

Figure 14-30 Congure HDD Error Alarm

Step 4 When the Trigger Alarm Output is selected, you can also select the alarm output to be triggered from the list below.

Step 5 Click the Apply buon to save the sengs.

Chapter 15 Camera Settings

15.1 Configuring OSD Settings

Purpose

You can congregate the OSD (On-Screen Display) sengs for the camera, including date/me, camera name, etc.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > OSD.

Step 2 Select the camera to congure OSD sengs.

Step 3 Edit the Camera Name in the text eld.

Step 4 Congure the Display Name, Display Date and Display Week by checking the checkbox.

Step 5 Select the Date Format, Time Format, Display Mode and the OSD Font.

OSD Configuration Camera [A1] Camera 01 Camera Name Camera 01 Display Name Display Date Display Week Date Format MM-DD-YYYY Time Format 24-hour Display Mode Non-Transparent & Not Flashing OSD Font 32x32

Figure 15-1 OSD Conguraon Interface

Step 6 You can use the mouse to drag the text frame on the preview window to adjust the OSD posion.

Step 7 Copy Camera Sengs

1) If you want to copy the OSD sengs of the current camera to other cameras, click the Copy buon to enter the Copy Camera interface, as shown in Figure 15-2.

Copy to Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 OK Cancel

Figure 15-2 Copy Sengs to Other Cameras

2) Select the camera (s) to be congured with the same OSD sengs. You can also check the checkbox of Analog to select all cameras.
3) Click the OK buon to nish the Copy sengs and back to the OSD Conguraon interface.

Step 8 Click the Apply buon to apply the seings.

15.2 Configuring Privacy Mask

Purpose

You are allowed to congregate the four-sided privacy mask zones that cannot be viewed or recorded by the operator.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Privacy Mask.

Step 2 Select the camera to set privacy mask.

Step 3 Check the checkbox of Enable Privacy Mask to enable this feature.

Privacy Mask Settings Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Privacy Mask Clear All Clear Zone 1 Clear Zone 2 Clear Zone 3 Clear Zone 4

Figure 15-3 Privacy Mask Sengs Interface

Step 4 Use the mouse to draw a zone on the window. The zones will be marked with dierent frame colors.

NOTE

Up to 4 privacy mask zones can be congured, and the size of each area can be adjusted.

Step 5 The congured privacy mask zones on the window can be cleared by clicking the corresponding Clear Zone1-4 icons on the right side of the window, or click Clear All to clear all zones.

Privacy Mask Settings Camera [A1] Camera 01 Enable Privacy Mask Clear All Clear Zone 1 Clear Zone 2 Clear Zone 3 Clear Zone 4

Figure 15-4 Set Privacy Mask Area

Step 6 You can click the Copy buon to copy the privacy mask sengs of the current camera to other cameras.

Please refer to step 7 of Chapter 15.1 Conguring OSD Sengs.

Step 7 Click the Apply buon to save the sengs.

15.3 Configuring Video Parameters

15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Image > Image Sengs.

Camera [A1] Camera 01 Time Segment 1 00:00-24:00 Mode Standard Brightness 128 Contrast 128 Saturation 128 Hue 128 Sharpness 1 Denoising 2 Default Copy Apply Back

Figure 15-5 Image Sengs Interface (Analog Camera)

Camera [D2] IPdome Time Segment 1 00:00-24:00 Mode Custom Brightness 128 °C Contrast 153 °C Saturation 204 °C Default Copy Apply Back

Figure 15-6 Image Sengs Interface (IP Camera)

Step 2 Select the camera to set image parameters.

Step 3 Two periods for dierent image sengs are provided, select the period name in the drop-down list.

i NOTE

The me periods cannot be overlapped with each other.

Step 4 Select the mode from the drop-down list of Mode, there are four modes selectable for the analog cameras: Standard, Indoor, Dim Light and Outdoor.

Step 5 Adjust the image parameters according to actual needs. The parameters include Brightness, Contrast, Saturaon, Hue, Sharpness and Denoising for the analog cameras and Brightness, Contrast and Saturaon for the IP cameras. You can also click Restore to set the parameters to the default sengs.

Step 6 You can click Copy to copy the image sengs of the current camera to other cameras.

Step 7 Click Apply to save the sengs.

15.3.2 Configuring Camera Parameters Settings

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Image > Camera Parameters Seings.

Image Settings Camera Parameters Settings Camera [A1] Camera 01 Signal Switch Not Support Enable Defog Day to Ni... Night to D... IR Light B... Defog Level Day/Night Mode WDR Switch Not Support Default Copy Apply Back

Figure 15-7 Camera Parameters Sengs

Step 2 Select the Camera from the drop-down list.

Step 3 Congure the parameters.

• Switch the 4 MP or 5 MP signal from the Signal Switch drop-down list. 4 MP 25/30 fps and 5 MP 20 fps are selectable. The 4 MP 25 fps and 4 MP 30 fps signals are self-adapve for the camera.
• Check Enable Defog to enable the defog funcon of the selected camera. And set the Defog Level from 1 to 4.
• Adjust the parameters including Day to Night Sensitivity, Night to Day Sensitivity and IR Light Brightness for the analog cameras.
• Select the Day/Night Mode of the camera from the drop-down list.
• Check the WDR Switch checkbox to enable the funcon of the camera.

Step 4 (Oponal) Click Default to set the parameters to the default sengs.

Step 5 (Oponal) Click Copy to copy the parameters of the current camera to other analog cameras.

Step 6 Click Apply to save the sengs.

● The camera parameters sengs is only applicable for ananlog cameras.
- The 4 MP/5 MP Signal Switch, Defog, Day to Night Sensitivity, Night to Day Sensitivity, IR Light Brightness, Day/Night Mode, and WDR Switch funcons must be supported by the connected analog camera. You cannot set the parameters if the connected analog camera does not support them or there is no video signal.
● The parameters are saved to the connected analog camera and are not saved to the DVR.
- The default value of Day to Night Sensitivity, Night to Day Sensitivity and IR Light Brightness is 5. The eecve value ranges from 1 to 9.
- If you exit from the interface and enter it again, the parameters displayed are those you have set the last me.
- The DVR connects to the analog camera via coaxitron and there is no response mechanism. Even if the coaxitron is abnormal, the parameters are sll displayed to be set successfully.

Chapter 16 DVR Management and Maintenance

16.1 Viewing System Information

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > System Info.

Step 2 You can click the Device Info, Camera, Record, Alarm, Network and HDD tabs to view the system informaon of the device.

Device Info Camera Record Alarm Network HDD Device Name Embedded Net DVR Model DS-7216HUHI-K2 Serial No. 1620170505CCWR758945057WCVU Firmware Version V3.5.30, Build 171113 Hardware Version 0xa3600 Please scan the QR code via IVMS client.

Figure 16-1 System Informaon Interface

16.2 Searching Log Files

Purpose

The operaon, alarm, excepon and informaon of the DVR can be stored in log les, which can be viewed and exported at any me.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Log Informaon.

Log Search Start Time 01-07-2015 00:00:00 End Time 18-07-2015 23:59:59 Major Type All Minor Type Alarm Input Alarm Output Motion Detection Started Motion Detection Stopped Video Tampering Detection Started Video Tampering Detection Stopped Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Started Video Quality Diagnostics Alarm Stopped Line Crossing Detection Alarm Started Export All Search Back

Figure 16-2 Log Search Interface

Step 2 Set the log search conditions to rene your search, including the Start Time, End Time, Major Type and Minor Type.

Step 3 Click the Search buon to start search log les.

Step 4 The matched log les will be displayed on the list shown below.

i NOTE

Up to 2000 log les can be displayed each me.

Search Result No. Major Type Time Minor Type Parameter Play Details 1 Information 10-07-2015 09:53:59 Local HDD Infor... N/A 2 Operation 10-07-2015 09:53:59 Power On N/A 3 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:05 Start Recording N/A 4 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:08 Local Operation... N/A 5 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:25 HDD S.M.A.R.T. N/A 6 Information 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Start Recording N/A 7 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Local Operation... N/A 8 Operation 10-07-2015 09:54:32 Local Operation... N/A 9 Exception 10-07-2015 09:55:32 IP Camera Disco... N/A 10 Information 10-07-2015 10:04:09 System Running... N/A Total: 2000 P: 1/20 Export Back

Figure 16-3 Log Search Results

Step 5 You can click the ☑ buon of each log or double-click it to view its detailed informaon. And you can also click the ☐ buon to view the related video les if available.

Log Information Time 11-12-2015 08:52:15 Type Information--Local HDD Information Local User N/A Host IP Address N/A Parameter Type N/A HDD 1 Description: HDD: 1 Serial: WD-WCAV58050978 Firmware: 01.00A01 Model: WDC WD10EVVS-63M5B0 Previous Next OK

Figure 16-4 Log Informaon Interface

Step 6 If you want to export the log les, click the Export buon to enter the Export menu, as shown below.

Export Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 .mp4:zip Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play Final Data Folder 01-12-2013 09:29:56 ch01_2015071600... 992.56MB File 16-07-2015 14:12:16 ch02_2015071613... 76.55MB File 16-07-2015 14:13:22 Free Space 6357.23MB New Folder Format Export Back

Figure 16-5 Export Log Files

Step 7 Select the backup device from the drop-down list of Device Name.

Step 8 Click the Export to export the log les to the selected backup device.

You can click the New Folder buon to create new folder in the backup device, or click the Format buon to format the backup device before log export.

NOTE

• Please connect the backup device to DVR before operang log export.
• The log les exported to the backup device are named by exporng me, e.g., 20110514124841logBack.txt.

16.3 Importing/Exporting IP Camera Info

Purpose

The informaon of added IP camera can be generated into an excel le and exported to the local device for backup, including the IP address, manage port, password of admin, etc. And the exported le can be edited on your PC, like adding or deleng the content, and copy the seng to other devices by imporng the excel le to it.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Camera > Camera > IP Camera Import/Export.

Step 2 Click the Export buon to export conguraon les to the selected local backup device.

Step 3 To import a conguraon le, select the le from the selected backup device and click the Import buon. Aer the imporg process is completed, you must reboot the DVR.

16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files

Purpose

The conguraon les of the DVR can be exported to local device for backup; and the conguraon les of one DVR can be imported to mulple DVR devices if they are to be congured with the same parameters.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Import/Export.

Import/Export Config File Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 *.bin Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play devCfg_406198462_20... 8160.44KB File 23-01-2015 15:13:50 Free Space 1895.11MB New Folder Import Export Back

Figure 16-6 Import/Export Conguraon File

Step 2 Click the Export buon to export conguraon les to the selected local backup device.

Step 3 To import a conguraon le, select the le from the selected backup device and click the Import buon. Aer the import process is completed, you must reboot the DVR.

Aer having nished the import of conguraon les, the device will reboot automacally.

16.5 Upgrading System

Purpose

The rmware on your DVR can be upgraded by local backup device or remote FTP server.

16.5.1 Upgrading by Local Backup Device

Step 1 Connect your DVR with a local backup device where the update rmware le is located.

Step 2 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Upgrade > Local Upgrade.

Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 - *.dav;*.mav - Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Del... Play digicap.mav 21,872KB File 07-02-2013 11:47:30

Figure 16-7 Local Upgrade Interface

Step 3 Select the update le from the backup device.

Step 4 Click Upgrade to start upgrading.

Step 5 Aer the upgrading is completed, reboot the DVR to acvate the new rmware.

16.5.2 Upgrading by FTP

Before you start

Congure PC (running FTP server) and DVR to the same Local Area Network. Run the 3 ^rd -party TFTP soware on the PC and copy the rmware into the root directory of TFTP.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Upgrade > FTP.

FTP Server Address

Figure 16-8 FTP Upgrade Interface

Step 2 Enter the FTP Server Address in the text eld.

Step 3 Click the Upgrade buon to start upgrading.

Step 4 Aer the upgrading is completed, reboot the DVR to acvate the new rmware.

16.6 Upgrading Camera

Purpose

You can upgrade mulple connected analog cameras supporting Turbo HD or AHD signal simultaneously with DVR.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Upgrade > Camera Upgrade.

Analog A1 A2 A3 A4 Device Name USB Flash Disk 1-1 .bin Refresh Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play

Figure 16-9 Camera Upgrade

Step 2 Check the checkbox(es) of the analog camera(s) for upgrading.

NOTE

The analog camera must support Turbo HD or AHD signal.

Step 3 Select the update le from the backup device.

Step 4 Click the Upgrade buon to start upgrading.

16.7 Restoring Default Settings

Step 1 Go to Menu > Maintenance > Default.

Default Restore Defaults Simply restore the settings. Factory Defaults Restore all parameters to default settings. Restore to Inactive Restore the device to inactive status.

Figure 16-10 Restore Defaults

Step 2 Select the restoring type from the following three opons.

Restore Defaults: Restore all parameters, except the network (including IP address, subnet mask, gateway, MTU, NIC working mode, default route, server port, etc.) and user account parameters, to the factory default sengs.

Factory Defaults: Restore all parameters to the factory default sengs.

Restore to Inacve: Restore the device to the inactive status.

Step 3 Click the OK buon to restore the default sengs.

NOTE

The device will reboot automacally aer restoring to the default sengs.

Chapter 17 Others

17.1 Configuring General Settings

Purpose

You can congregate the output resolution, system me, mouse pointer speed, etc.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > General > General.

General DST Settings More Settings Language English Output Standard PAL VGA/HDMI1 Resolution 1280*1024/60HZ HDMI2 Resolution 1280*1024/60HZ Time Zone (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Urumqi, Singapore Date Format MM-DD-YYYY System Date 07-26-2017 System Time 14:02:03 Mouse Pointer Speed Enable Wizard ✓ Enable Password ■

Figure 17-1 General Sengs Interface (for DS-7300/9000HUHI Series)

General DST Settings More Settings Language English Output Standard PAL VGA/HDMI Resolution 1280*1024/60HZ Time Zone (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Unumql, Singapore Date Format MM-DD-YYYY System Date 04-20-2016 System Time 16:05:32 Mouse Pointer Speed Enable Wizard ✓ Enable Password ■

Figure 17-2 General Setngs Interface (for Other Models)

Step 2 Congure the following sengs:

● Language: The default language used is English.
- Output Standard: Select the output standard to be PAL or NTSC.
- VGA/HDMI Resolution: Select the output resoluon, which must be the same with the resoluon of the VGA/HDMI display.

NOTE

For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series, VGA/HDMI1 Resoluon and HDMI2 Resoluon can be congured separately. Up to 1920 × 1080/60 Hz resoluon is supported for VGA/HDMI1 output and up to 4K (3840 × 2160)/30 Hz resoluon is supported for HDMI2 output.

● Time Zone: Select the me zone.
● Date Format: Select the date format.
● System Date: Select the system date.

● System Time: Select the system me.

- Mouse Pointer Speed: Set the speed of mouse pointer; 4 levels are congorable.

- Enable Wizard: Enable/disable the Wizard when the device starts up.

- Enable Password: Enable/disable the use of the login password.

NOTE

If you check the checkbox of Enable Password, every me when you log in to the DVR, the Unlock Pattern interface will pop up. If you uncheck the checkbox of Enable Password, when you log in to the DVR, the Unlock Paern interface will not pop up.

Step 3 Click the Apply buon to save the sengs.

17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial Port

NOTE

The RS-232 serial port is supported by DS-7300HQHI and DS-7300/9000HUHI series DVR.

Purpose

The RS-232 port can be used in two ways:

• Parameters Conguraon: Connect a PC to the DVR through the PC serial port. Device parameters can be congured by using soware such as HyperTerminal. The serial port parameters must be the same as the NVR's when connecng with the PC serial port.
• Transparent Channel: Connect a serial device directly to the DVR. The serial device will be controlled remotely by the PC through the network and the protocol of the serial device.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > RS-232.

RS-232 Settings Baud Rate 115200 Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 Parity None Flow Ctrl None Usage Console

Figure 17-3 RS-232 Sengs Interface

Step 2 Congure RS-232 parameters, including baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, ow control and usage.

Step 3 Click the Apply buon to save the sengs.

17.3 Configuring DST Settings

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > General > DST Sengs.

General DST Settings More Settings ■ Auto DST Adjustment Enable DST From Apr 1st Sun 2 : 00 To Oct last Sun 2 : 00 DST Bias 60 Minutes

Figure 17-4 DST Sengs Interface

Step 2 Check the checkbox before the Auto DST Adjustment item.

Or you can manually check the Enable DST checkbox, and then you choose the date of the DST period.

17.4 Configuring More Settings

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > General > More Sengs.

General DST Settings More Settings Device Name Embedded Net DVR Device No. 255 CVBS Output Brightness Auto Logout 5 Minutes Menu Output Mode Auto Enhanced VCA Mode

Figure 17-5 More Sengs Interface

Step 2 Congure the following sengs:

● Device Name: Edit the name of DVR.
● Device No.: Edit the serial number of DVR. The Device No. can be set in the range of 1 to 255, and the default No. is 255.

• Auto Logout: Set meout me for menu inacvity. E.g., when the meout me is set to 5 Minutes, then the system will exit from the current operaon menu to live view screen aer 5 minutes of menu inacvity.
• CVBS Output Brightness: Adjust the video output brightness via the CVBS interface.
• Menu Output Mode: You can choose the menu display on dierent video output.

For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series, Auto, HDMI1/VGA, and HDMI2 are selectable.

For other models, Auto and HDMI/VGA are selectable.

- Enhanced VCA Mode: For HUHI series DVR, the enhanced VCA mode conicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input. You can enable or disable VCA mode.

Enable Enhanced VCA Mode

1) Check the checkbox to enable enhanced VCA mode.
2) Click Apply and the aenon box pops up as below.

Attention Enhanced VCA mode will enable all-channel line crossing detection and intrusion detection, and disable 2K/4K output resolution and 4 MP/5 MP signal input. New settings will take effect after reboot. Click "Yes" to reboot now or "No" to restore the olds settings. Yes No

Figure 17-6 Enable Enhanced VCA Mode

3) Click Yes to apply the funcon and reboot the device.

Disable Enhanced VCA Mode

1) Uncheck the checkbox to disable enhanced VCA mode.
2) Click Apply and the aenon box pops up as below.

Attention Disable enhanced VCA mode, the 2K/4K output resolution and 4 MP/5 MP signal input will be supported, and the line crossing detection and intrusion detection will be supported by 2-ch only. New settings will take effect after reboot. Click "Yes" to reboot now or "No" to restore the olds settings. Yes No

Figure 17-7 Disable Enhanced VCA Mode

3) Click Yes to apply the funcon and reboot the device.

If you have congured 2K/4K output, or connected 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input already, when you enable enhanced VCA mode and aer the device reboots, the output resolution will decrease to 1080p, and the 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input will display no video.

Step 3 Click Apply to save the sengs.

17.5 Managing User Accounts

Purpose

There is a default account in the DVR: Administrator. The Administrator user name is admin and the password is set when you start the device for the rst me. The Administrator has the permission to add and delete user and congure user parameters.

17.5.1 Adding a User

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > User.

User Management No. User Name Security Level User's MAC Address Pe... Edit Del... 1 admin Strong P... Admin 00:00:00:00:00:00 Add Back

Figure 17-8 User Management Interface

Step 2 Click the Add buon to enter the Add User interface.

Add User User Name example 1 Password ****** Confirm ****** Level Guest User's MAC Address 00 :00 :00 :00 :00 :00 ✓ Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Cancel

Figure 17-9 Add User Menu

Step 3 Enter the informaon for new user, including User Name, Password, Conrm, Level and User's MAC Address.

Password: Set the password for the user account.

WARNING

STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-We highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case leers, lower case leers, numbers, and special characters.) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly, especially in the high security system, reseng the password monthly or weekly can beer protect your product.

Level: Set the user level to Operator or Guest. Dierent user levels have dierent operang permission.

• Operator: The Operator user level has permission of Two-way Audio in Remote Conguraon and all operang permission in Camera Conguraon by default.
• Guest: The Guest user has no permission of Two-way Audio in Remote Conguraon and only has the local/remote playback in the Camera Conguraon by default.

User's MAC Address: The MAC address of the remote PC which logs onto the DVR. If it is congured and enabled, it only allows the remote user with this MAC address to access the DVR.

Step 4 Click the OK buon to save the sengs and go back to the User Management interface. The added new user will be displayed on the list, as shown below.

User Management No. User Name Security Level User's MAC Address Per... Edit Delete 1 admin Strong Pas... Admin 00:00:00:00:00:00 - - - 2 example 1 Strong Pas... Guest 00:00:00:00:00:00 ✓ ✓ ✓

Figure 17-10 Added User Listed in User Management Interface

Step 5 You can assign permissions for the added user.

1) Select the user from the list and then click ✅ to enter the Permission Sengs interface, as shown below.

Permission Local Configuration Remote Configuration Camera Configuration ✓ Local Log Search ■ Local Parameters Settings ■ Local Camera Management ■ Local Advanced Operation ■ Local Shutdown / Reboot Apply OK Cancel

Figure 17-11 User Permission Sengs Interface

2) Set the operang permission of Local Conguraon, Remote Conguraon and Camera Conguraon for the user.

Local Conguraon

• Local Log Search: Searching and viewing logs and system informaon of device.
• Local Parameters Sengs: Conguring parameters, restoring factory default parameters and imporng/exporng conguraon les.
• Local Camera Management: Enabling and disabling analog camera (s). Adding, deleng and eding of network camera (s). This funcon is supported by HDVR series.
• Local Advanced Operation: Operang HDD management (initializing HDD, seeing HDD property), upgrading system rmware.
• Local Shutdown /Reboot: Shung down or reboong the device.

Remote Conguraon

● Remote Log Search: Remotely viewing logs that are saved on the device.
- Remote Parameters Sengs: Remotely configuring parameters, restoring factory default parameters and imporng/exporng conguraon les.
- Remote Camera Management: Remotely enabling and disabling analog camera (s), and adding, deleng and eding of network camera (s). This funcon is supported by HDVR series.
● Remote Serial Port Control: Conguring sengs for RS-485 port.
- Remote Video Output Control: Sending remote control panel signal.
● Two-way Audio: Realizing two-way radio between the remote client and the device.
- Remote Alarm Control: Remotely arming (nofy alarm and excepon message to the remote client) and controlling the alarm output.

• Remote Advanced Operaon: Remotely operang HDD management (inializing HDD, seng HDD property), upgrading system rmware.
• Remote Shutdown/Reboot: Remotely shung down or reboong the device.

Camera Conguraon

• Remote Live View: Remotely viewing live video of the selected camera (s).
• Local Manual Operaon: Locally starng/stopping manual recording, picture capturing and alarm output of the selected camera (s).
• Remote Manual Operaon: Remotely starng/stopping manual recording, picture capturing and alarm output of the selected camera (s).
• Local Playback: Locally playing back recorded les of the selected camera (s).
• Remote Playback: Remotely playing back recorded les of the selected camera (s).
• Local PTZ Control: Locally controlling PTZ movement of the selected camera (s).
• Remote PTZ Control: Remotely controlling PTZ movement of the selected camera (s).
• Local Video Export: Locally exporng recorded les of the selected camera (s).

Local Camera Management is provided for the IP cameras only.

3) Click OK to save the seings and exit.

17.5.2 Deleting a User

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > User.

Step 2 Select the user to be deleted from the list, as shown below.

User Management No. User Name Security Level User's MAC Address Per... Edit Delete 1 admin Strong Pas... Admin 00:00:00:00:00:00 - - - 2 example 1 Strong Pas... Guest 00:00:00:00:00:00 ✓ ✓ ✓

Figure 17-12 User List

Step 3 Click delete the selected user account.

17.5.3 Editing a User

Purpose

For the added user accounts, you can edit the parameters.

Step 1 Go to Menu > Conguraon > User.

Step 2 Select the user to be edited from the list.

Step 3 Click the 📋 icon to enter the Edit User interface, as shown below.

Edit User User Name example 1 Change Password Password masked Confirm masked Level Guest User's MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Cancel Edit User User Name admin Old Password masked Change Password Password masked Confirm masked Enable Unlock Pattern Draw Unlock Pattern Export GUID User's MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 Valid password range [8-16]. You can use a combination of numbers, lowercase, uppercase and special character for your password with at least two kinds of them contained. OK Cancel

Figure 17-13 Edit User Interface

Step 4 Edit the corresponding parameters.

- Operator and Guest

You can edit the user informaon, including user name, password, permission level and MAC address. Check the checkbox of Change Password if you want to change the password, and input the new password in the text eld of Password and Conrm. A strong password is recommended.

- Admin

You are only allowed to edit the password and MAC address. Check the checkbox of Change Password if you want to change the password, and input the correct old password, and the new password in the text eld of Password and Conrm.

WARNING

STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-We highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case leers, lower case leers, numbers, and special characters.) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly, especially in the high security system, reseng the password monthly or weekly can beer protect your product.

NOTE

Hold the icon and you can see the clear text of the password. Release the mouse and the content of the password restores invisible.

Step 5 Edit the unlock paern for the admin user account.

1) Check the checkbox of Enable Unlock Paern to enable the use of unlock paern when logging in to the device.
2) Use the mouse to draw a paern among the 9 dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the paern is done.
3) Conrm the paern again with the mouse.

NOTE

Please refer to Chapter 2.3.1 Conguring the Unlock Paern for detailed instrucons.

Set Unlock Pattern Draw the unlock pattern first.

Figure 17-14 Set Unlock Paer for Admin User

Step 6 (Oponal) Click

icon aer Draw Unlock Paern to modify the paern.

Step 7 (Oponal) Click

icon aer Export GUID to pop up the Reset Password interface. Click port GUID to the USB ash drive for retrieving the forgoen password. be saved in the USB ash drive.

Reset Password Device Name: USB Flash Disk 1-1 Name Size Type Edit Date Delete Play 1.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-03-2016 11:47:04 10.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 10:20:07 11.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 10:20:15 12.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 10:20:13 13.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 11:47:01 14.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 11:47:09 15.bmp 6750.06KB File 09-06-2016 11:47:13 Free Space 14.28GB New Folder Export Back

Figure 17-15 Export GUID

NOTE

You must input the correct old password of the admin before exporng GUID.

Step 8 Click the OK buon to save the settings and exit from the menu.

Step 9 (Oponal) For the Operator or Guest user account, you can also click the the User Management interface to edit the permission.

button on

Chapter 18 Appendix

18.1 Specifications

18.1.1 DS-7100HQHI-K1

Model		DS-7104HQHI-K1	DS-7108HQHI-K1	DS-7116HQHI-K1
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporng coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for channel 1 of DS-7104HQHI-K1, channel 1/2 of DS-7108HQHI-K1, and channel 1/2/3/4 of DS-7116HQHI-K1.
	AHD input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	Support
	IP video input	1-ch	2-ch	2-ch
		Up to 4 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input/Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	HDMI/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz	HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
			VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	When 1080p Lite mode not enabled: 4 MP lite/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF;When 1080p Lite mode enabled: 4 MP lite/3 MP/1080p lite/720p lite/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:For 4 MP stream access: 4 MP lite@15fps; 1080p lite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 3 MP stream access: 3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@15fpsFor 1080p stream access: 1080p/720p@15fps; VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)When 1080p Lite mode enabled: 4 MP lite/3 MP@15fps; 1080p lite/720p lite/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF@12fps; CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
Network management	Remote connecons	32	64	128
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	1 SATA interface
	Capacity	Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adapve Ethernet interface		1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	Real panel: 2 × USB 2.0
General	Power supply	12 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 8 W	≤ 12 W	≤ 15 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	200 × 200 × 45 mm (7.9 × 7.9 × 1.8 inch)		285 × 210 × 45 mm (11.2 × 8.3 × 1.8 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 1 kg (2.2 lb)

18.1.2 DS-7200HQHI-K1

Model		DS-7204HQHI-K1	DS-7208HQHI-K1	DS-7216HQHI-K1
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporng coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for channel 1 of DS-7204HQHI-K1, for channel 1/2 of DS-7208HQHI-K1, and for channel 1/2/3/4 of DS-7216HQHI-K1.
	AHD input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	IP video input	1-ch	2-ch	2-ch
		Up to 4 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz	VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60HzHDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	When 1080p Lite mode not enabled: 4 MP lite/3MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF;When 1080p Lite mode enabled: 4 MP lite/3 MP/1080p lite/720plite/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:For 4 MP stream access: 4 MP lite@15fps; 1080plite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 3 MP stream access: 3MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@15fpsFor 1080p stream access: 1080p@15fps;720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)When 1080p Lite mode enabled:4 MP lite/3 MP@15fps; 1080p lite/720plite/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF@12fps; CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	32	64	128
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	1 SATA interface
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1^st audio input)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adapve Ethernet interface		1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	2 × USB 2.0		Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-485 (half-duplex)
General	Power supply	12 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 6 W	≤ 7.5 W	≤ 25 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	315 × 242 × 45 mm (12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 1.16 kg (2.6 lb)	≤ 1.78 kg (3.9 lb)	≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)

18.1.3 DS-7200HQHI-K2

Model		DS-7208HQHI-K2	DS-7216HQHI-K2
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	8-ch	16-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporng coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for channel 1/2 of DS-7208HQHI-K2, and for channel 1/2/3/4 of DS-7216HQHI-K2.
	AHD input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	IP video input	2-ch
		Up to 4 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz	VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60HzHDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluonFrame rate	When 1080p Lite mode not enabled: 4 MP lite/3MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF;When 1080p Lite mode enabled: 4 MP lite/3 MP/1080p lite/720plite/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIFMain stream:When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:For 4 MP stream access: 4 MP lite@15fps; 1080plite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 3 MP stream access: 3MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@15fpsFor 1080p stream access: 1080p@15fps;720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)When 1080p Lite mode enabled:4 MP lite/3 MP@15fps; 1080p lite/720plite/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF@12fps; CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	8-ch	16-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	64	128
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS,iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	2 SATA interfaces
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1^st audio input)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adapveEthernet interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000Mself-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	2 × USB 2.0	Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-485 (half-duplex)
General	Power supply	12 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 7.5 W	≤ 25 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	380 × 320 × 48 mm (15.0 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 1.78 kg (3.9 lb)	≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)

18.1.4 DS-7200HUHI-K1

Model		DS-7204HUHI-K1	DS-7208HUHI-K1
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25	8 MP, 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25
	AHD input	5 MP, 4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	IP video input	2-ch	4-ch
		Up to 6 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz	VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60HzHDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	5 MP/4 MP/3MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF	8 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:5 MP@12fps/4 MP@15fps/3MP@18fps1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)	Main stream:8 MP@8fps/5 MP@12fps/4MP@15fps/3 MP@18fps1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch
Network management	Remote connécons	32	64
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	1 SATA interface
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1^st audio input)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adapve Ethernet interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	2 × USB 2.0	Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-485 (half-duplex)
	Alarm in/out	4/1	8/4
General	Power supply	12 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 10 W	≤ 20 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	315 × 242 × 45 mm (12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 1.16 kg (2.6 lb)	≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)

18.1.5 DS-7200HUHI-K2

Model		DS-7204HUHI-K2	DS-7208HUHI-K2	DS-7216HUHI-K2
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporng coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25	8 MP, 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25
	AHD input	5 MP, 4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	IP video input	2-ch	4-ch	8-ch
		Up to 6 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz	VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60HzHDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	5 MP/4 MP/3MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF	8 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:5 MP@12fps/4MP@15fps/3 MP@18fps1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)	Main stream:8 MP@8fps/5 MP@12fps/4 MP@15fps/3MP@18fps1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	32	64	128
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	2 SATA interfaces
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1^st audio input)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adapve Ethernet interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	2 × USB 2.0	Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-485 (half-duplex)
	Alarm in/out	4/1	8/4	16/4
General	Power supply	12 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 10 W	≤ 20 W	≤ 25 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	380 × 320 × 48 mm (15.0 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 1.16 kg (2.6 lb)	≤ 1.78 kg (3.9 lb)	≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)

18.1.6 DS-7200HQHI-K/P

Model		DS-7204HQHI-K1/P	DS-7208HQHI-K2/P	DS-7216HQHI-K2/P
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporng coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for channel 1 of DS-7204HQHI-K1/P, channel 1/2 of DS-7208HQHI-K2/P, and channel 1/2/3/4 of DS-7216HQHI-K2/P..
	AHD input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	PoC camera input	Supports Hikvision PoC cameraNote: Do not unplug or plug the PoC camera if it is powered by the external power supply.
	IP video input	1-ch	2-ch
		Up to 4 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz		VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
				HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	When 1080p Lite mode not enabled: 4 MP lite/3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF;When 1080p Lite mode enabled: 4 MP lite/3 MP/1080p lite/720p lite/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:For 4 MP stream access: 4 MP lite@15fps; 1080p lite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 3 MP stream access: 3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@15fpsFor 1080p stream access: 1080p@15fps; 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)When 1080p Lite mode enabled:4 MP lite/3 MP@15fps; 1080p lite/720p lite/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF@12fps; CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	32	64	128
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	1 SATA interface	2 SATA interfaces
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1^st audio input)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adapve Ethernet interface		1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	2 × USB 2.0		Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-485 (half-duplex)
General	Power supply	48 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 40 W	≤ 60 W	≤ 120 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions(W × D × H)	315 × 242 × 45 mm(12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8 inch)	380 × 320 × 48 mm (15.0 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
	Weight(without HDD)	≤ 1.16 kg (2.6 lb)	≤ 1.78 kg (3.9 lb)	≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)

18.1.7 DS-7200HUHI-K/P

Model		DS-7204HUHI-K1/P	DS-7208HUHI-K2/P
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25	8 MP, 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25
	AHD input	5 MP, 4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	PoC camera input	Supports Hikvision PoC cameraNote: Do not unplug or plug the PoC camera if it is powered by the external power supply.
	IP video input	2-ch	4-ch
		Up to 6 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
output	HDMI/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz	VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60HzHDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF	8 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:5 MP@12fps/4 MP@15fps/3MP@18fps1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps(P)/30fps (N)	Main stream:8 MP@8fps/5 MP@12fps/4MP@15fps/3 MP@18fps1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps(P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	32	64
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	1 SATA interface	2 SATA interfaces
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the rst audio input)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adapve Ethernet interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	2 × USB 2.0	Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0 Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-485 (half-duplex)
	Alarm in/out	4/1	8/4
General	Power supply	48 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 40 W	≤ 60 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	315 × 242 × 45 mm (12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8 inch)	380 × 320 × 48 mm (15.0 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)	≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)

18.1.8 DS-7300HQHI-K4

Model		DS-7304HQHI-K4	DS-7308HQHI-K4	DS-7316HQHI-K4
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporng coaxitron conncon4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for channel 1 of DS-7304HQHI-K4, channel 1/2 of DS-7308HQHI-K4, and channel 1/2/3/4 of DS-7316HQHI-K4.
	HDTV1 input
	AHD input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	IP video input	2-ch (up to 6-ch)	2-ch (up to 10-ch)	2-ch (up to 18-ch)
		Up to 6 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI/VGA output	HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
		VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluonFrame rate	When 1080p Lite mode not enabled: 4 MP lite/3MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF;When 1080p Lite mode enabled: 4 MP lite/3 MP/1080p lite/720plite/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIFMain stream:When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:For 4 MP stream access: 4 MP lite@15fps; 1080plite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 3 MP stream access: 3MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@15fpsFor 1080p stream access: 1080p@15fps;720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps(P)/30fps (N)When 1080p Lite mode enabled:4 MP lite/3 MP@15fps; 1080p lite/720plite/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF@12fps; CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
	Audio output	2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	128
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS,iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP
Hard disk	SATA	4 SATA interfaces
	eSATA	Support
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex), Keyboard
	Alarm in/out	16/4
General	Power supply	100 to 240 VAC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 30 W	≤ 40 W	≤ 55 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	445 × 390 × 70 mm (17.5 × 15.4 × 2.8 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 5 kg (11.0 lb)

18.1.9 DS-7300HUHI-K4

Model		DS-7304HUHI-K4	DS-7308HUHI-K4	DS-7316HUHI-K4
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporng coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	8 MP, 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60
	AHD input	5 MP, 4 MP, 720p25, 720p30, 1080p25, 1080p30
	HDCVI input	4 MP, 720p25, 720p30, 1080p25, 1080p30
	CVBS input	Support
	IP video	2-ch (up to 6-ch)	2-ch (up to 10-ch)	2-ch (up to 18-ch)
	input	Up to 8 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Network bandwidth	200 Mbps		260 Mbps
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI1/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	HDMI2 output	1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	8 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:8 MP@8fps/5 MP@12fps; 4 MP@ 15fps; 3 MP@18fps;1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
	Audio output	2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch	16-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	128
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS,iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP
Hard disk	SATA	4 SATA interfaces
	eSATA	Support
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
Disk array	Array type	RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
	Network interface	2, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex), Keyboard
	Alarm in/out	16/4
General	Power supply	100 to 240 VAC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 35 W	≤ 45 W	≤ 65 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	445 × 390 × 70 mm (17.5 × 15.4 × 2.8 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 5 kg (11.0 lb)

18.1.10 DS-9000HUHI-K8

Model		DS-9008HUHI-K8	DS-9016HUHI-K8
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	8-ch	16-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporng coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	8 MP, 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60
	AHD input	5 MP, 4 MP, 720p25, 720p30, 1080p25, 1080p30
	HDCVI input	4 MP, 720p25, 720p30, 1080p25, 1080p30
	CVBS input	Support
	IP video input	10-ch (up to 18-ch)	18-ch (up to 32-ch)
		Up to 12 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Network bandwidth	260 Mbps	320 Mbps
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	8-ch	16-ch
		RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI1/VGA output	1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	HDMI2 output	1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Video loop	Support
	Encoding resoluon	8 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:8 MP@8fps; 5 MP@12fps; 4 MP@ 15fps; 3 MP@18fps;1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
	Audio output	2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	8-ch	16-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	128
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP
Hard disk	SATA	8 SATA interfaces
	eSATA	Support
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk.
Disk array	Array type	RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, RAID 10
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
	Network interface	2, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex), Keyboard
	Alarm in/out	16/8
General	Power supply	100 to 240 VAC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 45 W	≤ 65 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	445 × 470 × 90 mm (17.5 × 18.5 × 3.5 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 8 kg (17.6 lb)

18.1.11 DS-7204HTHI-K1

Model		DS-7204HTHI-K1
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron conncon
	HDTV1 input	8 MP, 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25
	AHD input	5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	IP video input	2-ch
		Up to 8 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI/VGA output	VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
		HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	8 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:8 MP@12fps, 5 MP@20fps, 3 MP@18fps4 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 16 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	32
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	1 SATA interface
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1^st audio input)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-485 (half-duplex)
	Alarm in/out	4/1
General	Power supply	12 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 15 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	315 × 242 × 45 mm (12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)

18.1.12 DS-7200HTHI-K2

Model		DS-7204HTHI-K2	DS-7208HTHI-K2
Video/Audio input	Video compression	H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264
	Analog video input	4-ch	8-ch
		BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron conncon
	HDTV I input	8 MP, 5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p30, 1080p25, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25
	AHD input	5 MP, 4 MP, 3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	HDCVI input	4 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
	CVBS input	PAL/NTSC
	IP video input	2-ch	4-ch
		Up to 8 MP resoluon
		Supports H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 IP cameras
	Audio compression	G.711u
	Audio input	4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
Video/Audio output	CVBS output	1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resoluon: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
	HDMI/VGA output	VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
		HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
	Encoding resoluon	8 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
	Frame rate	Main stream:8 MP@12fps, 5 MP@20fps, 3 MP@18fps4 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
		Sub-stream:WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
	Video bit rate	32 Kbps to 16 Mbps
	Audio output	1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
	Audio bit rate	64 Kbps
	Dual stream	Support
	Stream type	Video, Video & Audio
	Synchronous playback	4-ch	8-ch
Network management	Remote conncons	32	64
	Network protocols	TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik-Connect, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnPTM, HTTPS, ONVIF
Hard disk	SATA	2 SATA interfaces
	Capacity	Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
External interface	Two-way audio input	1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1^st audio input)
	Network interface	1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adapve Ethernet interface
	USB interface	Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
	Serial interface	RS-485 (half-duplex)
	Alarm in/out	4/1	8/4
General	Power supply	12 VDC
	Consumpon (without HDD)	≤ 15 W	≤ 20 W
	Working temperature	-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
	Working humidity	10% to 90%
	Dimensions (W × D × H)	380 × 320 × 48 mm (15.0 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
	Weight (without HDD)	≤ 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)	≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)

18.2 Glossary

• Dual-Stream: Dual-stream is a technology used to record high resolution video locally while transming a lower resolution stream over the network. The two streams are generated by the DVR, with the main stream having a maximum resolution of 1080P and the sub-stream having a maximum resolution of CIF.
• DVR: Acronym for Digital Video Recorder. A DVR is device that is able to accept video signals from analog cameras, compress the signal and store it on its hard drives.
• HDD: Acronym for Hard Disk Drive. A storage medium which stores digitally encoded data on plaers with magnec surfaces.
• DHCP: Dynamic Host Conguraon Protocol (DHCP) is a network applicaon protocol used by devices (DHCP clients) to obtain conguraon informaon for operaon in an Internet Protocol network.
• HTTP: Acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. A protocol to transfer hypertext request and informaon between servers and browsers over a network
• PPPoE: PPPoE, Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulang Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) frames inside Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver (modem) over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks.
• DDNS: Dynamic DNS is a method, protocol, or network service that provides the capability for a networked device, such as a router or computer system using the Internet Protocol Suite, to nofy a domain name server to change, in real me (ad-hoc) the acve DNS conguraon of its congured hostnames, addresses or other informaon stored in DNS.
  • Hybrid DVR: A hybrid DVR is a combinaon of a DVR and NVR.
• NTP: Acronym for Network Time Protocol. A protocol designed to synchronize the clocks of computers over a network.
• NTSC: Acronym for Naonal Television System Commiee. NTSC is an analog television standard used in such countries as the United States and Japan. Each frame of an NTSC signal contains 525 scan lines at 60Hz.
• NVR: Acronym for Network Video Recorder. An NVR can be a PC-based or embedded system used for centralized management and storage for IP cameras, IP Domes and other DVRs.
• PAL: Acronym for Phase Alternang Line. PAL is also another video standard used in broadcast televisions systems in large parts of the world. PAL signal contains 625 scan lines at 50Hz.
• PTZ: Acronym for Pan, Tilt, Zoom. PTZ cameras are motor driven systems that allow the camera to pan le and right, lt up and down and zoom in and out.

- USB: Acronym for Universal Serial Bus. USB is a plug-and-play serial bus standard to interface devices to a host computer.

18.3 Troubleshooting

- No image displayed on the monitor aer the device is starng up normally.

Possible Reasons:

— No VGA or HDMI conneccons.
— Connecon cable is damaged.
— Input mode of the monitor is incorrect.

Step 1 Verify the device is connected with the monitor via HDMI or VGA cable.

If not, please connect the device with the monitor and reboot.

Step 2 Verify the conneccon cable is good.

If there is sll no image display on the monitor aer reboong, please check if the conncon cable is good, and change a cable to connect again.

Step 3 Verify Input mode of the monitor is correct.

Please check the input mode of the monitor matches with the output mode of the device (e.g. if the output mode of DVR is HDMI output, then the input mode of monitor must be the HDMI input). And if not, please modify the input mode of monitor.

Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the step 1 to step 3.

If it is solved, nish the process.

If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.

● There is a beep sound aer a new bought device starts up.

Possible Reasons:

— No HDD is installed in the device.
— The installed HDD has not been inialized.
— The installed HDD is not compatible with the device or is broken-down.

Step 1 Verify at least one HDD is installed in the device.

1) If not, please install the compatible HDD.

NOTE

Please refer to the "Quick Operaon Guide" for the HDD installaon steps.

2) If you do not want to install a HDD, select "Menu>Conguraon > Excepons", and uncheck the Audible Warning checkbox of "HDD Error".

Step 2 Verify the HDD is inialized.

1) Select "Menu>HDD>General".

2) If the status of the HDD is "Uninialized", please check the checkbox of corresponding HDD and click the "Init" buon.

Step 3 Verify the HDD is detected or is in good condition.

1) Select "Menu>HDD>General".
2) If the HDD is not detected or the status is "Abnormal", please replace the dedicated HDD according to the requirement.

Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the step 1 to step 3.

1) If it is solved, nish the process.
2) If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.

● Live view stuck when video outputs locally.

Possible Reasons:

— The frame rate has not reached the real-me frame rate.

Step 1 Check the parameters of Main Stream (Connuous) and Main Stream (Event).

Select "Menu > Record > Parameters > Record", and set the resoluon of Main Stream (Event) the same as the one of Main Stream (Connuous).

Step 2 Verify the frame rate is real-me frame rate.

Select "Menu > Record > Parameters > Record", and set the Frame Rate to Full Frame.

Step 3 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.

If it is solved, nish the process.

If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.

- When using the device to get the live view audio, there is no sound or there is too much noise, or the volume is too low.

Possible Reasons:

— Cable between the pickup and camera is not connected well; impedance mismatches or incompatible.
— The stream type is not set as "Video & Audio".

Step 1 Verify the cable between the pickup and camera is connected well; impedance matches and compatible.

Step 2 Verify the seng parameters are correct.

Select "Menu > Record > Parameters > Record", and set the Stream Type as "Audio & Video".

Step 3 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.

If it is solved, nish the process.

If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.

- The image gets stuck when DVR is playing back by single or multi-channel cameras.

Possible Reasons:

— The frame rate is not the real-me frame rate.
— The DVR supports up to 16-channel synchronize playback at the resolution of 4CIF, if you want a 16-channel synchronize playback at the resoluon of 720p, the frame extracng may occur, which leads to a slight stuck.

Step 1 Verify the frame rate is real-me frame rate.

Select "Menu > Record > Parameters > Record", and set the Frame Rate to "Full Frame".

Step 2 Verify the hardware can aord the playback.

Reduce the channel number of playback.

Select "Menu > Record > Encoding > Record", and set the resoluon and bitrate to a lower level.

Step 3 Reduce the number of local playback channel.

Select "Menu > Playback", and uncheck the checkbox of unnecessary channels.

Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.

If it is solved, nish the process.

If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.

- No record le found in the device local HDD, and the prompt "No record le found" pops up when you search the record les.

Possible Reasons:

— The me seng of system is incorrect.
— The search condition is incorrect.
— The HDD is error or not detected.

Step 1 Verify the system me seng is correct.

Select "Menu > Conguraon > General > General", and verify the "System Time" is correct.

Step 2 Verify the search condition is correct.

Select "Playback", and verify the channel and me are correct.

Step 3 Verify the HDD status is normal.

Select "Menu > HDD > General" to view the HDD status, and verify the HDD is detected and can be read and written normally.

Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.

If it is solved, nish the process.

If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.

18.4 Summary of Changes

• Add new models: DS-7204HTHI-K1 and DS-7200HTHI-K2. (Chapter 1.5 Rear Panel, Chapter 18.1 Specicaons)
• You can enable false alarm ler for the moon detecon of the PIR cameras. Then only when the moon detecon events and PIR events are both triggered, the moon detecon alarm will be triggered. (Chapter 8.2 Seng PIR Camera Alarm)
• The device will note that the exported AVI video may have problems if the frame rates of the connuous and event recording are dierent. (Chapter 5.1 Conguring Encoding Parameters)
• When Hikvision CVBS camera is connected, you can control PTZ via Coaxitron and call the OSD of the camera. (Chapter 4 PTZ Controls)
• For HQHI series DVR, full channel recording at up to 4 MP lite resoluon is supported. (Chapter 5.1 Conguring Encoding Parameters, Chapter 18.1 Specicaons)
• HTHI, 7208/7216HUHI, 7300HUHI, and 9000HUHI series DVR support up to 8 MP resolution of all the channels. (Chapter 5.1 Conguring Encoding Parameters, Chapter 18.1 Specicaons)
• For 7208/7216HUHI, 7300HUHI, and 9000HUHI series DVR, if the video encoding is H.264 or H.265, when 8 MP signal input is connected, H.264+ or H.265+ is disabled. If the video encoding is H.264+ or H.265+, when 8 MP signal input is connected, the video encoding will change to H.264 or H.265 automacally, and H.264+ or H.265+ is disabled. (Chapter 5.1 Conguring Encoding Parameters)
• HTHI series DVR support full-channel line crossing detecon and intrusion detection, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon. For HUHI series DVR, if enhanced VCA mode is enabled, full-channel line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon are supported, but 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input are not supported; if enhanced VCA mode is disabled, 2-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon are supported, and 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP/8 MP signal input are also supported. (Chapter 10 VCA Alarm)
• For HUHI and HTHI series DVR, if you set the video output resoluon as 1024*768, when you set more than 16 windows, the device will recommend you to switch to higher output resoluon. If you set the video output resoluon as 1280*720 or 1280*1024, when you set more than 25 windows, the same note will pop up. (Chapter 3.4 Adjusng Live View Sengs)
• The power supply logic for PoC camera has changed. (Chapter 2.8 Connecng PoC Cameras)
• Adds the QR codes for iOS and Android users to download Hik-Connect applicaon. (Chapter 12.2.2 Conguring Hik-Connect)

• Add new models: DS-7300HUHI-K4 and DS-9000HUHI-K8. (Chapter 1.1 Front Panel, Chapter 1.5 Rear Panel, Chapter 18.1 Specicaons)
• For DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series, there are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080 resoluon is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resoluon is supported. (Chapter 3.2 Operaons in Live View Mode, Chapter 3.4 Adjusng Live View Sengs, Chapter 17.1 Conguring General Sengs)
• POS configurable for DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series. (Chapter 9 POS Conguraon)
• Manual capture, connuous capture of video images, playback and backup of captured pictures for DS-7300/9000HUHI-K series. (Chapter 6 Playback, Chapter 7 Backup)

18.4.3 Version 3.5.20

Added:

• Add new models: DS-7100HQHI-K1, DS-7216HQHI-K2/P, DS-7200HUHI-K/P, and DS-7300HQHI-K4. (Chapter 1.1 Front Panel, Chapter 1.5 Rear Panel, Chapter 17.1 Specicaons)
• DS-7200HUHI-K/P series DVR support PoC (Power over Coaxitron) cameras conncon. (Chapter 2.8 Connecng PoC Cameras)
• Day/night mode and WDR switch are congorable for the connected analog cameras supporting these funcons. (Chapter 14.3.2 Conguring Camera Parameters)
• DS-7200HUHI series support line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon. DS-7200HQHI series support 4-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and DS-7216HQHI series also support 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. DS-7300HQHI-K series DVR support 4-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. (Chapter 5.5 Conguring Event Recording)

18.4.4 Version 3.5.10

Added:

• Add new models: DS-7204/7208HQHI-K1, DS-7208HQHI-K2, DS-7204HUHI-K1/K2, and DS-7200HQHI-K/P. (Chapter 1.1 Front Panel, Chapter 1.5 Rear Panel, Chapter 18.1 Specicaons)

• DS-7200HQHI-K/P series DVR support PoC (Power over Coaxitron) cameras conncon. (Chapter 2.8 Connecng PoC Cameras)

• The resolution of sub-stream can be selected among WD1, 4CIF, and CIF. (Chapter 5.1 Conguring Encoding Parameters)

• The minimum frame rate for main stream and sub-stream is 1 fps. (Chapter 5.1 Conguring Encoding Parameters)
• DS-7200HUHI-K series support line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon of all channels, and 2-ch sudden scene change detecon. DS-7204/7208HQHI-K series support 2-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon. DS-7216HQHI-K series support 2-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon, and 1-ch sudden scene change detecon. DS-7200HQHI-K/P series support 2-ch line crossing detecon and intrusion detecon. (Chapter 5.5 Conguring Event Recording)
• DS-7200HQHI-K/P series DVR can detect the PoC module exception. When it cannot detect the PoC module or the PoC module is powered o abnormally, alarms are triggered, and linkage methods are congorable. (Chapter 8.6 Handling Excepons)

18.4.5 Version 3.5.0

Added:

• Add new models: DS-7200HUHI-K2, DS-7208HUHI-K1, and DS-7216HQHI-K. (Chapter 1.1 Front Panel, Chapter 1.5 Rear Panel, Chapter 18.1 Specicaons)
  New funcons for -K series DVR:
• The analog signal inputs (Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, CVBS) and IP signal input can be recognized and connected automacally. (Chapter 2.8 Viewing Signal Input Status)
• H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264 encoding for the main stream, and H.265/H.264 for the sub-stream of analog cameras. (Chapter 5.1 Conguring Encoding Parameters)
• Connectable to H.265 and H.264 IP cameras. (Chapter 5.1 Conguring Encoding Parameters)

18.5 List of Compatible Hikvision IP Cameras

Type	Model	Version	Max. Resolution	Sub-stream	Audio
HD Network Camera	DS-2CD7153-E	V5.1.0 build 131202	1600×1200	√	×
	DS-2CD754F-EI	V5.1.0 build 131202	2048×1536	√	√
	DS-2CD783F-EI	V5.1.0 build 131202	2560×1920	√	√
	DS-2CD7164-E	V5.1.0 build 131202	1280×720	√	×
	DS-2CD864FW D-E	V5.1.0 build 131202	1600×1200	√	√
	DS-2CD4026F WD 14.33	V5.1.0 build5 131202	1920×1080	√	√
	DS-2CD6233F 14.24	V5.1.0 build5 131202	2048×1536	√	×
	DS-2CD2012-I	V5.1.0build1 31202	1280×960	√	×
	DS-2CD4012F	V5.1.0 build 131202	1280×1024	√	√
	DS-2CD4232F WD-I	V5.1.0 build 131202	2048×1536	√	√
SD Network Camera	DS-2CD793PF WD-EI	V5.1.0 build 131202	704×576	√	√
Intelligence Trac Camera	iDS-2CD9122	V3.5.0 build131012	1920×1080	×	×
	iDS-2CD9121	V3.4.2 build 130718	1600×1200	×	×
Network Speed Dome	DS-2DF7274	V5.1.0 build 130923	1280×960	√	√
	DS-2DE7174	V5.0.2Build1 30926	1280×960	√	√

NOTE

For the list, our company holds right to interpret.

18.6 List of Compatible Third-Party IP Cameras

Manufacturer	Model	Version	Max. Resolution	Sub-stream	Audio
Axis	P3304	5.2	1440×900	√	×
Sony	SNC-RH 124	1.7.00	1280×720	√	√
Samsung	SND-50 80P	3.10_130 416	1280×1024	√	√
Vivotek	FD8134	0107a	1280×800	√	×
Bosch	Dinion NBN-92 1-P	V105004 53	1280×720	×	×
Panasonic	SP306H	Applica on: 1.34 Image Data: 1.06	1280×960	×	√
Cannon	VB-H41 0	Ver.+1.0. 0	1280×960	×	√
Zavio	F3206	MG.1.6.0 2c045	1920×1080	√	×
Pelco	IX30DN -ACFZH B3	1.8.2-20 120327- 2.9080-A 1.7852	2048×1536	√	×

18.7 List of Applicable Power Adapter

NOTE

Use only power supplies listed in the user instrucons.

Power Adapter Model	Specifications	Manufacturer
MSA-C1500IC12.0-18P-DE	12 V, 1.5 A	0000201935MOSO Technology Co., Ltd.
ADS-25FSG-12 12018GPG	CE, 100 to 240 VAC, 12 V, 1.5 A, 18 W, Φ5.5 × 2.1 × 10	0000200174Shenzhen Honor Electronic Co., Ltd.
MSA-C1500IC12.0-18P-US	12 V, 1.5 A	0000201935MOSO Technology Co., Ltd.
TS-A018-120015AD	100 to 240 VAC, 12 V, 1.5 A, 18 W, Φ5.5 × 2.1 × 10	0000200878Shenzhen Transin Technologies Co., Ltd.
MSA-C2000IC12.0-24P-DE	12 V, 2 A	0000201935MOSO Technology Co., Ltd.
ADS-24S-12 1224GPG	CE, 100 to 240 VAC, 12 V, 2 A, 24 W, Φ2.1	0000200174Shenzhen Honor Electronic Co., Ltd.
MSA-C2000IC12.0-24P-US	US, 12 V, 2 A	0000201935MOSO Technology Co., Ltd.
ADS-26FSG-12 12024EPCU	US, 12 V, 2 A	0000200174Shenzhen Honor Electronic Co., Ltd.
KPL-040F-VI	12 V, 3.33 A, 40 W	0000203078Channel Well Technology Co., Ltd.
MSA-Z3330IC12.0-48W-Q	12 V, 3.33 A	0000201935MOSO Technology Co., Ltd.
MSP-Z1360IC48.0-65W	48 V, 1.36 A	0000201935MOSO Technology Co., Ltd.
KPL-050S-II	48 V, 1.04 A	0000203078Channel Well Technology Co., Ltd.

030503001071130

First Choice for Security Professionals